b) city of carmel beach restrooms_project manual-part 2_techinical specifications 02-25-2014

PROJECT MANUAL

PART 2 OF 2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

City of Carmel Beach Restrooms

Bid Set

February 25, 2014

Project No. 09112

plemaster

Typewritten Text

plemaster

Typewritten Text

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

City of Carmel Beach Restrooms February 25, 2014 Studio Carver – Job #1302 Bid Set

Table of Contents Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS SPECIFICATION GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work Section 01 14 00 - Work Restrictions Section 01 26 13 - Request for Interpretation Section 01 29 00 - Payment Procedures Section 01 31 13 - Project Coordination Section 01 31 19 - Project Meetings Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 00 - Special Procedures Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements Section 01 42 00 - References Section 01 43 00 - Quality Assurances Section 01 43 39 - Mockup Requirements Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 56 39 - Temporary Tree and Plant Protection Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements Section 01 62 00 - Product Substitution Procedures Section 01 71 00 - Examination and Preparation Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering Section 01 73 00 - Execution Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal Section 01 76 00 - Protecting Installed Construction Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals

FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 32 00 - Geotechnical Investigation

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

Section 03 05 16 - Crystalline Waterproofing Additive Section 03 15 00 - Concrete Accessories Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

Section 04 43 16 - Anchored Stone Veneer

DIVISION 05 - METALS Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry



DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07 14 00 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing Section 07 55 56 - Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 12 13 - Steel Frames Section 08 14 00 - Wood Doors Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware Section 08 80 00 - Glazing

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Section 09 22 00 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board Section 09 30 00 - Tiling Section 09 81 00 - Acoustical Insulation Section 09 91 00 - Painting Section 09 96 23 - Graffiti-Resistant Coatings

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

Section 10 14 00 – Signage Section 10 28 13 - Toilet Accessories

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

Not Used

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Not Used

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Not Used

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used

FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION Not Used

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

Not Used

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) Not Used

DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION Not Used

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Not Used



DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Not Used

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

Not Used

SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK Not Used

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 15 16 - Decomposed Granite Surfacing Section 32 84 00 - Planting Irrigation Section 32 91 13 - Living Roof Growing Medium Section 32 93 00 - Plant List

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES Not Used

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

City of Carmel Beach Restrooms Febuary 25, 2014

Studio Carver – Job #1302 Bid Set

Summary of Work

01 11 00 - 1

SECTION 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: The following subjects are covered in this Section:

1. Project Name and Identification.

2. Project Description.

3. Applications of Contract Documents

4. Contract Method.

5. Work Sequence.

1.2 PROJECT NAME AND IDENTIFICATION

Project Name: City of Carmel Beach Restrooms

Project Number: Studio Carver – Job #1302

1.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. Work of the Project includes construction 191 square foot men and women ADA restroom facility with a

vegetated roof. Site work consists of new stone retaining walls, stone trash enclosure and accessible path.

1.4 APPLICATIONS OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 - General

Requirements of the Specifications, apply to the work specified in each Section of the Specifications.

B. Contractor is hereby specifically directed to notify and apprise all subcontractors and other parties engaged

in the Work as to Contents of the Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 -

General Requirements.

C. No contractual adjustment shall be due or become exigent as a result of failure to fully understand the

Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 - General Requirements.

1.5 CONTRACT METHOD

A. Perform the Work of Contract under a single lump sum contract with Owner in accordance with Conditions of

Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used

END OF SECTION 01 11 00

City of Carmel Beach Restrooms February 25, 2014


Work Restrictions

01 14 0 - 1

SECTION 01 14 0 - WORK RESTRICTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Contractor’s Use of Owner’s Premises.

2. Time Restrictions for Performing Work.

3. Publicity Releases.

1.2 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF OWNER’S PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Confine operations at the site to the areas permitted by the Contract Documents. Portions of the

site beyond areas on which work is indicated are not to be disturbed unless approved in advance in writing by

Owner.

B. In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements shown on Drawings, and indicated by other Contract

Documents, administer allocation of available space to produce best overall efficiency in performance of total

work of project.

C. Contractor will have use of the premises for work and storage as approved by Owner.

D. Contractor shall no unreasonably encumber site/premises with material, equipment, debris material, or

recycling material.

E. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on Project

site.

F. Parking: Refer to Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

G. Noise: Refer to Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

H. Promptly clean up debris dropped in the immediate area due to work, service access ways or streets under this

Contract to the satisfaction of Architect.

I. Use the premises for work and construction operations to allow for work by other contractors, utility

companies, and Owner.

J. Provide, locate, and protect control points. Provide, coordinate, and check dimensions and elevations as

necessary for layout work.

K. If the areas on the premises are not sufficient, obtain and pay for use of additional work, storage, and parking

areas needed.

1.3 TIME RESTRICTIONS FOR PERFORMING WORK

A. Contractor shall follow any City of Carmel-by-the Sea time restrictions for performing work.

1.4 PUBLICITY RELEASES

A. Do not release any information, story, photograph, plan, or drawings relating information about the project to

anyone, including press or other public communication medium without Owner’s written permission.



Work Restrictions

01 14 0 - 2






Request for Interpretation

01 26 13 - 1

SECTION 01 26 13 - REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: The procedures to be followed by Contractor upon discovery of any apparent

conflicts, omissions, or errors in Contract Documents or upon having any question concerning interpretation.

1.2 PROCEDURES

A. Notification by Contractor:

1. Submit all requests for clarification and additional interpretation in writing to Architect using the

Request for Interpretation (RFI) form provided by Architect or a similar form approved by Architect.

2. Number RFIs sequentially. Follow RFI number with sequential alphabetical suffix as necessary for

each resubmission. For example, the first RFI would be “001”. The second RFI would be “002”.

The first resubmittal of RFI “002” would be “002a”.

3. Limit each RFI to one issue on one subject and to no more than five questions.

4. Submit RFIs if one of the following conditions occur:

a. Contractor discovers an unforeseen condition or circumstance that is not described in the

Contract Documents.

b. Contractor discovers an apparent conflict or discrepancy between portions of the Contract

Documents that appears to be inconsistent or is not reasonably inferred from the intent of the

Contract Documents.

c. Contractor discovers what appears to be an omission from the Contract Documents that

cannot be reasonably inferred from the intent of the Contract Documents.

5. RFIs will not be recognized or accepted if, in the opinion of Architect, one of the following conditions

exist:

a. Contractor submits the RFI as a request for substitution.

b. Contractor submits the RFI as a submittal.

c. Contractor submits the RFI under the pretense of a Contract Documents discrepancy or

omission without thorough review of the Documents.

d. Contractor submits the RFI as a request for information that is clearly shown on Contract

Document.

e. Contractor submits the RFI in a manner that suggest that specific portions of the Contract

Documents are assumed to be excluded or by taking an isolated portion of the Contract

Documents in part rather than whole.

f. Contractor submits an RFI in an untimely manner without proper coordination and

scheduling of work or related trades.

g. Contractor submits an RFI that does not conform to requirements of this Section.

h. Contractor submits an RFI that does not conform to the above, Contractor shall pay the cost

of any review, which cost shall be deducted from the Contract Sum.

6. Contractor shall ask for any clarification or request for interpretation immediately upon discovery.

Contractor shall submit RFIs in a reasonable time frame so as not to affect the project schedule while

allowing the full response time described below.

7. RFI shall carry the following information:

a. Applicable specification section, article, and paragraph numbers.

b. Drawing number and detail references as needed.

B. Response Time:

1. Architect, whose decision will be final and conclusive, shall resolve such questions and issue

instructions to Contractor within a reasonable time frame. In most cases, RFIs will receive a response

within 14 calendar days. In some cases this time may need to be lengthened for complex issues, or

shortened for emergency situations, as mutually agreed by all parties.



Request for Interpretation

01 26 13 - 2

2. Should Contractor proceed with the work affected before receipt of a response from Architect, within

the response time described above, any portion of the work which is not done in accordance with

Architect’s interpretations, clarifications, instructions, or decisions is subject to removal or

replacement and Contractor shall be responsible for all resultant losses.

C. Additional Detailed Instructions:

1. Architect may furnish additional detailed, written instructions to further explain the work and such

instructions shall be a part of Contract Documents. Should additional detailed instructions in the

opinion of Contractor constitute work in excess of the scope of Contract, Contractor shall submit

written notification thereof to Architect within seven calendar days following receipt of such

instruction, and in any event prior to the commencement of work thereon. Architect will then

consider such notice and if Architect considered it justified, Architect’s instructions will be revised, or

an extra work authorization will be issued.

2. Contractor has no claim for additional compensation or extension of the schedule because of any such

additional instructions unless Contractor gives Architect written notice thereof within the time frame

as specified above.

D. Failure to Agree: In the event of failure to agree as to the scope of Contract requirements, Contractor shall

follow procedures set forth in the disputes clause.






Payment Procedures

01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: Requirements for submission of Application for Payment.

1.2 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Format: Contractor’s standard form and automated electronic media printout will be considered for approval

upon Contractor’s request. .

B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment.

C. Submit updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment.

D. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.

E. Number: Submit three copies for each application.

F. Substantiating Data for Progress Payment:

1. When Owner or Architect requires substantiating information, submit data, submit information, with a

cover letter identifying:

a. Project Name.

b. Application number and date.

c. Detailed list of enclosures.

d. For stored products and materials:

1) Item number and identification as shown on application.

2) Description of specific product and material.

2. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application.

3. Current period’s General Contractor Conditional Waiver and the prior period’s Unconditional

Waiver.

4. Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and venders.

5. Record documents specified in Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals, for review by Owner that will

be returned to Contractor.

6. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products or materials.

7. Construction progress schedules, revised and current as specified in Section 01 32 00 – Construction

Progress Documentation.

8. Current construction photographs specified in Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress

Documentation.

G. Preparation of Application for Final Payment:

1. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments.

2. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as specified in Section

01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures.

H. Submittal Procedure:

1. Submit Applications for Payment to Owner at the times stipulated in the Agreement.

2. Number: Three copies of each Application.

3. When Owner and Contractor agree on percentages to be requested, and when agreed and signed by

them and Architect. Architect will transmit the Certificate for Payment to Owner.



Payment Procedures

01 29 00 - 2

4. Approval and signing of the Application for Payment by Owner and Architect is contingent upon

approval of the current status of Record Documents and submittal of updated construction schedule

1.3 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Based upon Application for Payment submitted to Architect by Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued

by Architect, Owner will make progress payments on account f the Contract Sum to Contractor as follows:

1. Each Month: Ninety percent of the portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to labor, materials,

and equipment incorporated in Work and 90 percent of the portion of the Contract Sum properly

allocable to materials and equipment suitably stored at the site, up to the end of month prior to date on

which the Application for Payment is submitted, less the aggregate of previous payments in each case.

2. Upon substantial Completion: A sum sufficient to increase the total payments to 90 percent of the

Contract Sum, less such amounts as Architect shall determine for all incomplete work and unsettled

claims.

3. At the time the Work is 50 percent complete and thereafter, if the manner of prosecution of work and

its progress are and remain satisfactory to Architect and upon Owner's acceptance, Architect may

authorize remaining partial payments to be paid in full. The full retainage may be reinstated if the

manner of prosecution of work and its progress do not remain satisfactory to Architect or for other

good and sufficient reason.

1.4 FINAL PAYMENT

A. Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, will be paid by Owner to Contractor

35 days after Substantial Completion of the Work unless otherwise stipulated in the Certificate of Substantial

Completion, provided the work has been completed, the Contract fully performed, Owner had filed Notice of

Completion, and a final Certificate of Payment has been issued by Architect.






Project Coordination

01 31 13 - 1

SECTION 01 31 13 - PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Description of requirements for Project coordination of the Work of the

Contract.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordination of Work include, but are not

necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Contractor’s Coordination.

2. Coordination meetings.

3. Coordination of Drawings.

4. Coordination of Submittals

5. Coordination of Contract Closeout.

6. Correspondence and Notices

1.3 CONTRACTOR’S COORDINATION

A. Work of the Contract includes coordination of the entire Project from beginning of construction activity

through Project close-out and warranty periods.

B. Coordinate the Work and do not delegate responsibility for coordination to any subcontractor.

C. Coordination includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Work of subcontractors so those portions of the Work are performed in manner that minimizes

interference with progress of the Work.

2. Coordinating Work with all public agencies.

3. Anticipation of interrelationship of all subcontractors and their relationship with the Work.

4. Resolve differences or disputes between subcontractors and material supplies concerning

coordination, interference, or extent of work between Sections.

5. Coordinate the work of subcontractors and materials suppliers so that their work is performed in a

manner to minimize interference with and to facilitate progress of the Work.

6. Scheduling, submittals, and the Work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and

orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for

accommodating items to be installed later.

7. Coordination of tolerances of all materials to ensure a proper fit in achieving the intent of Contract

Documents.

8. Coordination of substrates to receive work with conditions under which the work is to be

performed. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to Architect. Do not proceed with the work

until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

9. Coordination of work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,

connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

10. Coordination of enclosure of the work with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize the

necessity of uncovering work for that purpose.

11. Coordination of equipment with mechanical and electrical work.

12. Primary, major, and accessory materials and items necessary to complete the installation.

13. Labor operations and material items reasonably incidental for finishing.

14. Performance of work and delivery of materials in accordance with established construction schedules.

15. Coordination of removal and replacement of work which does not comply with Contract

Documents.




01 31 13 - 2

D. Coordinate all aspects of construction operations, generally, and specifically as required to provide Owner

with a complete, operable facility.

1. Resolve any dispute over coordination, or failure to coordinate, such that resolution is consistent

with Contract Documents. When such resolution is not possible, refer to the General Conditions.

2. Cooperate with other contractors on the Project site and with Architect so that completion of all

work can proceed with prudent speed.

a. Furnish other contractors, whose work is fitted to this work, detail and erection drawings

giving full information regarding the fabrication and assembly of this Work.

b. So far as possible, drawings shall indicate checked field measurements.

c. Cooperate in timing this Work to join with the work of other contractors or Owner.

3. Check the drawings of other contracts for interferences with this Work and promptly report to

Architect, in writing, any such interference.

4. Submit complete information, including Drawings, descriptions, sketches, marked prints, and

similar items, as required for Architect’s review and coordination of drawings by others that are a

part of this Work.

E. Coordination of mechanical and electrical work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Scheduling and sequencing of mechanical and electrical work,

2. Sharing of access to Work spaces,

3. Integration of Work placed into limited spaces available for mechanical and electrical installations,

4. Protection of each trade’s Work by other trades,

5. Cutting and patching,

6. Tolerances,

7. Compatibility as a basis of selection,

8. Preparation of mechanical and electrical coordination drawings,

9. Inspections,

10. Systems commissioning,

11. Test, and

12. Utilization of mechanical and electrical temporary facilities.

F. It is recognized that the Contract Documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships of the

various elements and systems and their interfacing with other elements and systems. Establishing and

coordinating these relationships is the exclusive responsibility of Contractor. Lay out and arrange all elements

to contribute to safety and efficiency while maintaining the intent of the design. If conflicts arise, notify

Architect before proceeding with installation.

G. Immediately refer to Architect any requirement shown or specified which Contractor finds or believes:

1. Is not equal to industry standards for achieving a first quality installation as intended;

2. Is excessive in cost or effort to effect intended results;

3. Is below standard for proper enforcement of guarantees/warranties required; or

4. Is at variance with governing laws, regulations, codes, or standards.

H. Resolve differences or disputes between subcontractors concerning coordination, interference, sequencing

Work duration, or extent of the Work between Sections.

I. Anticipate the interrelationship of subcontractors so their work is performed in a manner that minimizes

interference with general progress of the Work and conforms to the Contract Documents.

J. Order and schedule delivery of materials in ample time to avoid delays in construction. If an item is found to

be unavailable, notify Architect immediately to permit Architect’s selection of suitable substitute.

K. Do not proceed with work operations relative to any matter referred to Architect for consideration until receipt

of appropriate instructions from Architect.




01 31 13 - 3

L. As an integral step of starting each installation, recheck measurements of the Work. Advise Architect of any

discrepancies prior to installation.

M. Take all necessary precautions and implement sequences of construction to protect adjacent work from damage

caused by movement of Project components that would not normally occur in the completed Project.

N. Make provisions to accommodate items installed by Owner or by others under separate contracts.

O. Compatibility:

1. Provide products and equipment, which are compatible with other work requiring

mechanical/electrical interface including electrical connections, control devices, water drain and

piping connections. Verify voltage characteristics, fuel requirements, and other interface requirements

before ordering equipment and resolve conflicts that may arise.

2. Make connections to controls directly attached to ducts, piping, or mechanical equipment with

flexible connections.

P. Ensure that anchorage, blocking, joining and other detailing are provided as required.

Q. Ensure attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work are provided as required.

R. Guarantee/Warranty Period: During guarantee/warranty periods, supervise investigation and correction of

failure of deficiencies found or occurring in the work.

1.4 COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. In addition to progress meetings specified in Section 01 31 19 - Project Meetings, hold coordination meetings

and pre-installation conferences with requisite personnel to assure coordination of the Work.

B. Include in the progress meetings the coordination of various entities and activities. Where necessary, schedule

additional coordination meetings for coordinating the Work and resolving conflicts.

C. In advance of installation of every major unit of work, which requires coordination and interfacing with other

work, meet at project site with installers and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators who are involved

in or affected by unit of work. Review progress of other work and preparations for particular work under

consideration.

1.5 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures and Section 01 78 00

- Closeout Submittals.

B. Coordinate Requests for Information specified in Section 01 26 13 - Request for Interpretation.

C. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and

placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating elements, and affect on

work of other sections. Substitution procedures are specified in Section 01 62 00 - Product Substitution

Procedures.

1.6 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for for Substantial Completion.

B. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.




01 31 13 - 4

1.7 CORRESPONDENCE AND NOTICES

A. Clearly identify correspondence, notices and submittals with project name, subject and detailed references to

drawings and specifications.

B. Notify Architect two working days in advance of required inspections unless otherwise noted.






Project Meetings

01 31 19 - 1

SECTION 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section:

1. Contractor’s participation in preconstruction conference, project closeout meetings, and guarantees

and bonds review meeting.

2. Contractor’s administration of progress meetings, coordination meetings, and preinstallation meetings

and other meetings.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Prior to commencement of the Work, attend a preconstruction conference to discuss procedures to be followed

during the course of the work.

B. The purpose of the conference is to introduce Owner’s, Architect’s, and Contractor’s key personnel; to review

the contract provisions, project procedures, and other items pertaining to the Project; distribute documents

including sample forms referenced in the Contract Documents; answer any questions related to construction

contract administration; and establish schedule and procedures for future meetings.

C. Time and Location: As selected by Architect.

D. Meeting Chair: Architect.

E. Attending shall be:

1. Owner’s Representative

2. Owner’s Project Manager

3. Architect’s Representative

4. Architect’s Consultants

5. Contractor

6. Contractor’s Superintendent

7. Contractor’s Project Manager

8. Representatives of the major subcontractors

9. Others as deemed appropriate

F. Suggested Agenda: Final agenda will be prepared by Architect.

1. Introduction of Owner’s, Architect’s, and Contractor’s key personnel and designation of personnel

representing parties in Contract and Architect.

2. Distribution and discussion of:

a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers.

b. Projected Construction Schedule.

3. Project Coordination.

a. Designation of responsible personnel.

4. Communications Process and Procedures:

a. Inspection and test reports.

b. Field decisions.

c. Requests for Interpretation (RFI).

d. Proposal requests.

e. Submittals.

f. Change Orders.

g. Applications for Payment.

h. Contract closeout.



Project Meetings

01 31 19 - 2

5. Updating of construction schedule.

6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.

7. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids.

8. Temporary utilities.

9. Safety and first-aid procedures.

10. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents.

11. Distribute documents including sample forms referenced in the Contract Documents.

12. Answer any questions related to construction contract administration.

13. Site logistics.

14. Preparation for site mobilization meeting.

15. Establish schedule and procedures for future meetings.

16. Other requirements of Division 01.

G. Minutes: Contractor to record minutes including significant proceedings and decisions and distribute copies

within two working days to Architect, Owner, meeting participants, and those affected by decisions made at

meetings.

1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Schedule and administer progress meetings during course of construction of work to review the progress and

the status of the work, and to discuss any problems that may arise.

B. Meeting Schedule: At maximum one-week intervals or more often when required by progress of the Work.

C. Meeting Location: As approved by Architect.

D. Make physical arrangement for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, and preside at meetings.

Progress meetings shall be numbered consecutively.

E. Attending shall be:

1. Owner’s Representative as deemed appropriate

2. Owner’s Project Manager

3. Architect’s Representative including Consultants as appropriate

4. Contractor

5. Contractor’s Superintendent

6. Contractor’s Project Manager

7. Representatives of major suppliers as appropriate to agenda

8. Representatives of major subcontractors as appropriate to agenda

9. Others as deemed appropriate to the agenda

F. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers attending Project Meetings shall be qualified and

authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents.

G. Suggested Agenda: Final agenda will be prepared by Contractor.

1. Review and approve minutes of previous meeting.

2. Review unfinished business from previous meetings.

3. Review of work progress since previous meeting.

4. Discuss field observations, problems, and decisions.

5. Identification of problems that impede planned progress.

6. Review submittals schedule and status of submittals.

7. Review status of proposed substitutions.

8. Review Requests for Interpretation (RFI) and rank by urgency.

9. Review maintenance of progress schedule.

10. Agree on corrective measures to regain projected schedules.

11. Review planned progress during succeeding work period.



Project Meetings

01 31 19 - 3

12. Review coordination of projected progress.

13. Review maintenance of quality and work standards.

14. Review effect of pending changes and substitutions and their effect on the Work, on Construction

Schedule, and on completion date.

15. Status of Changes Orders.

16. Review delivery schedule of Owner furnished items.

17. Review status of Record Documents preparation.

18. Other items relating to the Work.

H. Minutes:

1. Contractor to record minutes including significant proceedings and decisions and distribute copies

within two working days to Owner, Architect, meeting participants, and those affected by decisions

made at meetings. Record in the minutes significant discussions and agreements and disagreements.

2. Identify items discussed at meetings by the meeting number and sequence in which it was raised to

action at the meeting; i.e.,

5th Progress Meeting

5th Item Discussed

3. Retain items in the minutes under unfinished Business until they are satisfactorily resolved.

4. If applicable, following the comments about any item include action pending statement that

specifically identifies who is responsible for following up on that item and a realistic date for the

action to be accomplished.

Action Pending: None

Date Required: N/A

5. Attendants taking exception to anything in the meeting report shall state their objections in writing,

within five working days following the receipt of the notes including significant proceedings and

decisions.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETING

A. Conduct a preinstallation meeting at the site before each construction activity that requires coordination with

other construction or when required by an individual Specification Section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, or involved in the installation, and its

coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow the

particular item of work or activity under consideration.

C. Meeting Schedule: Schedule conference to assure a sufficient amount of time prior to the scheduled work or

activity under consideration so that any concerns, problems or disagreements can be resolved without delaying

the Project. Notify Architect seven days in advance of meeting date.

D. Make physical arrangements for meeting, prepare agenda, and preside at meeting.

E. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers attending Project Meetings shall be qualified and

authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents.

F. Suggested Agenda: Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular

activity under consideration, including requirements for:

1. Contract Documents

2. Options

3. Related Change Orders

4. Purchases



Project Meetings

01 31 19 - 4

5. Deliveries

6. Shop Drawings, Product Data and quality control Samples

7. Possible conflicts

8. Compatibility problems

9. Time Schedules

10. Weather limitations

11. Manufacturer’s recommendations

12. Compatibility of materials

13. Acceptability of substrates

14. Temporary facilities

15. Space and access limitations

16. Governing regulations

17. Safety

18. Inspection and testing requirements

19. Required performance results

20. Recording requirements

21. Protection

G. Minutes: Contractor to record minutes including significant proceedings and decisions and distribute copies

within two days to Owner, Architect, meeting participants, and those affected by decisions made at meetings.

Record in the minutes significant discussions and agreements and disagreements.

H. Do not proceed with the work or activity if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever

actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of work and reconvene the conference at the

earliest feasible date.

1.5 OTHER REQUIRED MEETINGS

A. Coordination Meeting: Meet the requirements of Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination.

B. Project Closeout Meeting:

1. Thirty days prior to the estimated substantial completion, hold a meeting to review maintenance

manuals, guarantees, closeout submittals, bonds, and service contracts for materials and equipment.

Implement repair and replacement of defective items, and extend service and maintenance contracts

as desired by Owner.

2. Attending shall be:

a. Owner’s Representative

b. Owner’s Project Manager

c. Architect’s Representative

d. Architect’s professional consultants, as appropriate

e. Contractor

f. Subcontractors, as appropriate

g. Suppliers, as appropriate

h. Others, as appropriate

3. Minutes: Architect will record minutes including significant proceedings and decisions and distribute

copies within two working days to Owner, Contractor, meeting participants, and those affected by

decisions made at meetings.

C. Guarantees and Bonds Review Meeting:

1. Eleven months following the date of Substantial Completion Architect will convene a meeting for

reviewing the guarantees and bonds for materials and equipment.

2. Attending shall be:

a. Owner’s Representative

b. Owner

c. Architect’s Representative



Project Meetings

01 31 19 - 5

d. Architect’s consultants as appropriate

e. Contractor

f. Subcontractor as appropriate

g. Suppliers as appropriate

h. Others as appropriate

3. Minutes: Architect will record minutes including significant proceedings and decisions and distribute

copies within two working days to Owner, Contractor, meeting participants, and those affected by

decisions made at meetings.

1.6 CONTRACTOR MEETINGS

A. This Section does not limit meetings among Contractor, subcontractors, and others, as Contractor deems

necessary.






Construction Progress Documentation

01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Procedures for submitting the following construction progress documentation

submittals.

1. Construction Progress Schedule.

2. Submittal Schedule.

3. Daily Construction Reports.

4. Construction Photographs.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Construction progress documentation submittals are not Contract Documents and do not become Contract

Documents by virtue of their submission, review, and stamping by Architect.

1.3 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Make submittals of construction progress documentation to Architect or to an individual designated by

Architect.

B. Submittal received from sources other than Contractor will be returned without action.

C. Submit complete submittals for each portion of the work; submit components of the work interrelated as a

system at the same time.

D. Transmit each construction progress documentation submittal with Architect accepted form containing the

following information.

1. Date.

2. Project name.

3. Architect’s Project Number.

4. Architect’s name.

5. Contractor’s name.

6. Signature of transmitter.

7. Any other pertinent information.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Be responsible for the accuracy of construction progress documentation.

B. Prepare and distribute additional sets of reviewed submittals to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators,

suppliers, erectors, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Instruct parties to promptly

report inability to comply with requirements.

C. Maintain one set of each construction progress documentation submittal at the project site, available for

reference.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedule within 14 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed.




01 32 00 - 2

B. Type of Schedule: Horizontal bar chart with separate line of each major portion of Work or section of Work,

identifying first work day of each week.

C. Schedule Development:

1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other

logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and

duration.

2. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.

3. Coordinate Contractor’s construction schedule with list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress

reports, payment requests and other schedules.

4. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate

Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for Architect’s procedures necessary for

certification of Substantial Completion.

5. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.

Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements

involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically

sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work.

D. Submittal Schedule: Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples,

including dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. For each submittal allow at least 14

calendar days, excluding delivery time to and from Contractor, for review by Architect for each submittal or

resubmittal.

E. Delays:

1. Requests for delay must be submitted with Application for Payment.

2. Request for evaluation of delay will then be evaluated each month, and a decision rendered monthly,

so that extensions of time, if any, will be granted on a monthly basis.

3. If Contractor fails to identify this information in any given month, or if the request is denied and not

protested, Contractor will be deemed to have accepted the schedule as is, with no delays, extensions

of time and no possibilities of future evaluation.

F. Submission:

1. Submit two signed copies of initial Construction Progress Schedule.

2. Submit a signed copy revised Construction Progress Schedule with each Application for Payment.

3. Identify in writing any delays that impacted the critical path, and quantify the impact of that delay

with appropriate back up.

4. If Contractor’s Construction Progress Schedule submission is incomplete or late, Contractor’s

progress payment will be withheld until the schedule is corrected and received.

G. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to Architect, Owner,

subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting

room and temporary field office.

1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties

from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer

involved in construction activities.

1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Submit a comprehensive and complete Submittal Schedule within 14 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed.

B. Schedule Requirements/Development:

1. Identify on the schedule all of the submittal items required by the Contract Documents.

2. For each submittal item on the schedule, indicate the following.

a. The specification section number.

b. A place for the final submittal number.




01 32 00 - 3

c. Whether the submittal is for review or for the record.

d. Scheduled date for first submittal.

e. Scheduled date for resubmittal.

f. Scheduled date when Architect’s final release or approval is required to be returned to

Contractor.

g. Scheduled date by which the material or equipment must be on the site so as not to delay the

progress of the work.

3. Consider the nature and complexity of each submittal item and allow ample time for review, revision,

correction, resubmittal, and approval sufficiently in advance of the construction requirements.

a. Allow at least 14 calendar days, excluding delivery time to and from Contractor, for review

by Architect for each submittal or resubmittal.

b. Allow at least 21 calendar days, excluding delivery time to and from Contractor, for review

of complex submittals and resubmittals that require review by both Architect and its

Consultants.

c. No claim for delay will be granted to Contractor when the delay is caused by its failure to

make submittals in a timely manner and in accordance with the accepted Submittal Schedule.

d. Allow adequate time beyond the required review time for processing and distribution of each

submittal or resubmittal.

4. Schedule submittals in sequence with the schedule for work except as required for products known to

require long lead time. For submittal of items requiring long lead time, submit written verification of

the required lead time from the supplier, if requested.

5. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the Work so that work will

not be delayed by submittal processing. Coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals

for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination with

another.

6. Make the Submittal Schedule consistent with the Construction Progress Schedule required under this

Section.

7. To the greatest extent possible, make single submissions covering the entire work of individual

technical Specification Sections. Partial or “phased” submittals for work of the same Section will not

be reviewed.

C. Submission: Submit two copies of the Submittal Schedule after it is completed and each time it is updated by

Contractor.

D. Receipt of the Submittal Schedule by Architect will be a precondition of the receipt of the first progress

payment. Architect will review the Submittal Schedule to determine its completeness and compatibility with

the Construction Progress Schedule.

E. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distributed copies to Architect, Owner,

subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project

meeting room and field office.

1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties

from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer

involved in construction activities.

F. Schedule Updating:

1. At progress meetings, submit a detailed, updated and accurate schedule of anticipated submittals

remaining for review by Architect.

2. Revise the schedule every two weeks or more frequently if necessary, after each meeting or activity

where revisions have been recognized or made. Include all submittals required during the next 90

days of construction. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with minutes of each progress meeting.




01 32 00 - 4

1.7 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site:

1. List of subcontractors at the site.

2. Approximate count of personnel at the site.

3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.

4. Accidents and unusual events.

5. Meetings and significant decisions.

6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses.

7. Meter readings and similar recordings.

8. Emergency procedures.

9. Orders and requests of governing authorities.

10. Change Orders received, implemented.

11. Services connected, disconnected.

12. Equipment or system tests and start-ups.

13. Partial completions, occupancies.

14. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Submit for information two copies of each daily construction report to Architect at weekly intervals.

1.8 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Camera Type: Use digital type camera with 640 by 480 minimum resolution and capable of providing both

prints and electronic version of required photographs.

B. Exterior Photographs: Starting with site as existing, prior to any work of this Contract, and at

biweeklyintervals until completion of installation of all windows, window wall and exterior doors, and at

monthly intervals thereafter until completion of the total work, provide in three different exterior exposures per

interval from Architect-selected ground level or adjacent building locations.

C. Interior (Artificial Light Supplemented) Photographs: Starting with formwork for first suspended slab

construction and proceed at monthly intervals until start of interior painting, and at bimonthly intervals

thereafter until completion of total work, provide two different exposures per interval from Architect selected

locations.

D. Identify photographs with date, time, orientation, and project identification.

E. Submittal: Submit electronic version and two prints, color, glossy; 8 by 10 inch size; mounted on 8-1/2 by 11

inch soft card acid-free archival stock, with left edge binding margin for three hole punch.

F. Submit photographs with Application for Payment.






Submittal Procedures

01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Procedures for submitting the following types of submittals.

1. Product Data.

2. Shop Drawings.

3. Samples.

4. Manufacturer’s Instructions.

5. Manufacturer’s Field Reports.

B. Related Work Not Included in this Section:

1. Submittal schedule.

2. Specific section reference requiring submittal. Make submittals only where specifically required.

3. Requirements of other types of submittals including but not necessarily limited to, test reports,

construction photos, operating instructions, maintenance data, and maintenance materials.


A. Submittals are not Contract Documents and do not become Contract Documents by virtue of their submission,

review, and stamping by Architect.

B. Product Data and Samples for proposed substitutions shall be submitted to University's Representative in

accordance with Section 01 62 00 - Product Substitution Procedures.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining such copies of Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, and

other submittals as it may require for its own use.

1.3 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Make submittal promptly in accordance with the Submittal Schedule and in such sequence as to cause no delay

in the Work or in the work of any separate contractor.

B. Make all submittal to Architect or to an individual designated by Architect.

C. Failure on the part of Contractor to indicate approval on submittal prior to submission to Architect will result in

submittal being returned to Contractor without being acted upon.

D. No delays in construction occasioned by Contractor’s failure to submit material for approval in accordance

with the Submittal Schedule will be excused.

E. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.

F. Number and type of copies to be submitted, distributed, and returned will be as stated in this Section, unless

otherwise specified in technical Sections.

G. Submittal of information not required as a submittal, or covering work for which the submittal has been

returned as “approved” or “approved as noted”, will be returned without review.

H. Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not imply approval of assembly in which the item

functions.




01 33 00 - 2

I. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review.

J. Submittal received from sources other than Contractor will be returned without action.

K. Submit complete submittals for each portion of the work; submit components of the work interrelated as a

system at the same time.

L. When submittal acceptability is dependent on conditions, items, or materials included in separate subsequent

submittals, the submittal will be returned without review.

M. Transmittal:

1. Transmit each submittal with Architect accepted form containing the following information.

a. Date of submission and dates of any previous submissions.

b. Project name and number.

c. Architect’s Project Number.

d. The names of:

1) Contractor

2) Architect

3) Subcontractor, as applicable

4) Supplier, as applicable

5) Manufacturer, as applicable

e. Identification of system, product and material, as applicable.

f. Applicable Specification Section, Article, and Paragraph numbers.

g. Drawing number and detail references, as applicable.

h. Quantity and type of submittals.

i. Listing of documents and components that comprise the submittal.

j. Date submittal is requested back from Architect.

k. Distribution record (for both transmittal and submittals).

l. Notice of any deviations from the Contract Documents contained in the submittal. Supply

on separate sheets of Contractor’s letterhead.

m. Contractor’s certification that the information complies with Contract Document

requirements.

n. Signature of transmitter.

o. Any other pertinent information.

2. Number submittals sequentially. Marked revised or resubmitted submittals with original number and

sequential alphabetic suffix. For example, the first submittal would be “001”. The second submittal

would be “002”. The first resubmittal of “002” would be “002a”.

3. Incomplete transmittal forms are unacceptable and the entire submittal will be returned to Contractor

without review at Architect’s discretion.

N. Submittal Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each document or component of each

submittal for identification. Mark each copy of each submittal identically. Include the following information in

label or title block.

1. Submittal number.

2. Project name.

3. Project number.

4. Contractor’s name.

5. Subcontractor’s name, as applicable

6. Supplier’s name, as applicable

7. Manufacturer’s name, as applicable

8. Completely identify Samples with manufacturer’s name and model number, material name and

source, or similar information.

9. Provide space for Contractor’s and Architect’s review stamps.




01 33 00 - 3

O. Resubmittals:

1. If a submittal is returned for correction or is not satisfactory and is disapproved by Architect, resubmit

the corrected material in the same quantity, including reproducibles, as specified for the original

submittals.

2. Make resubmittal within 14 calendar days after receipt by Contractor of the disapproved material.

3. If the same document is used for resubmittal, clear identify revised portions of the document by

clouding.

4. Keep each resubmittal intact and do not add new drawings, materials, or information outside the

scope of the original submittal, except to answer Architect’s comments.


A. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to obtain Architect’s approval of required submittals prior to

initiating work represented.

B. Maintain a log of submittals showing the submittal number, the name of the Subcontractor making the

submittal (where applicable), date submitted, date received, and action by Architect. Submit current copy of

submittal log each month with Application for Payment.

C. Provide the following where applicable:

1. Field measurements.

2. Field construction criteria.

3. Catalog numbers and similar data.

4. Relation to adjacent structure or materials.

5. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.

6. Notes identifying deviations from the Contract documents.

D. Prior to sending submittals to Architect, Contractor is to review them for:

1. Submittal completeness and accuracy.

2. Compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.

3. Compatibility with other submittals, shop drawings, substitutions and work of other trades.

4. Coordination with existing job conditions.

5. Field verification of dimensions.

E. Apply Contractor’s stamp to each document and component of each submittal certifying that review,

verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of

information, is in accordance with the requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Contractor’s stamp

must be approved by Architect prior to the first submittal. Contractor shall stamp all submittals with submittal

number and date. Contractor to wet sign first page of bound sets of submittals. The person signing the stamp

shall be one designated in writing by Contractor as having that authority. Signature shall be in original ink.

Stamped signature is not acceptable.

F. Notify Architect in writing, at the time of submission, of deviations in submittals from the requirements of the

Contract Documents. Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submittals shall not be relieved by

Architect’s review of the submittals, unless Architect gives written acceptance of specific deviations clearly

identified by Contractor by clouding and the words “CONTRACT DEVIATION” and “SUBSTITUTION” in

bold face print. When submittal is revised for resubmission, identify changes made since previous submittal.

G. Contractor’s responsibility for errors and omissions in the submittals shall not be relieved by Architect’s review.

H. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the submittals and for the proper fitting, verification of

dimension, construction of the work, furnishing of materials, and work required by the Contract Documents but

not indicated on the submittals.




01 33 00 - 4

I. Submission of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or other submittals in either original submission or when

resubmitted with corrections, constitutes evidence that Contractor has checked all information, thereon, and

that it accepts and is willing to perform the work as shown, in a workmanlike manner, and in accordance with

the best standard practice.

J. Do not submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples for products that have not been specified unless such

products have been formally reviewed as a substitute in accordance with Section 01 62 00 - Product

Substitution Procedures.

K. Do not allow copies of submittals without Architect’s stamp indicating approval by Architect to be used in

connection with the Work. Do not permit submittals marked “Rejected” or “Revise and Resubmit” to be used

at the Project site, or elsewhere where work is in progress.

L. Do not proceed with fabrication or installation of materials, products or systems until final approved submittals

are in the possession of the fabricator or installer as appropriate.

M. Prepare and distribute additional sets of reviewed submittals to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators,

suppliers, erectors, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Instruct parties to promptly

report inability to comply with requirements or potential conflicts.

N. Maintain one set of each submittal at the project site, available for reference.

O. Maintain one set of reviewed submittals for Record Documents as described in Section 01 78 00 – Closeout

Submittals.

1.5 ARCHITECT’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Architect will review submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with the Submittal Schedule.

B. Architect will only review submittals for general conformance to the design concept and Contract Documents.

C. Do not construe Architect’s review of relieving Contractor of its responsibility for:

1. Errors in details, dimensions or quantities.

2. Departures from additional details or instructions previously furnished by Architect.

3. Integrating and coordinating various trades and separate contracts.

4. Any violation indicated on such submittals, of local, County, State, or Federal laws, rules, ordinances,

or rules and regulations of commissions, boards, or other authorities or public utilities having

jurisdiction.

5. Quantity, fit, and dimensions.

6. Full compliance with the Contract Documents.

D. Architect reserves the right to:

1. Reject submittals, which do not show evidence of being reviewed and approved by Contractor.

2. Reject submittals that are, in its opinion, incomplete or lack sufficient information.

3. Reject submittals that are for products or materials that have not been specified unless such products

and materials have been formally reviewed as substitutes in accordance with Substitution Section.

4. Withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals

are received.

5. Return without reviewing submittals with multiple items and no clear indication as to which item is to

be used in the Work.

6. Reject resubmittals that do not clearly indicate where revisions have been made to the previous

submittal.




01 33 00 - 5

E. Architect’s review is only for items to be furnished by the submitting subcontractor or supplier and does not

constitute approval of any assemblage of which the submitted item is a component nor approval of construction

sequence or method.

F. Architect will return without actions submittals not requested or required by Contract Documents or Architect.

G. Architect’s Actions:

1. Where action and return is required, Architect will review Contractor’s submittals, apply Architect’s

action stamp and indicate action, sign, and date.

2. The terms of Architect’s action stamp have the following meaning:

a. “APPROVED” -- indicates that Architect takes no specific exception to the information

contained in the submittal; Contractor may proceed with that portion of the Work described

in the submittal -- subject to compliance with all applicable requirements of the Contract

Documents.

b. “APPROVED AS NOTED” -- indicates that Architect approves the submittal for general

design conformance with the specific exceptions noted; Contractor may proceed with that

portion of the Work provided that the notations made by Architect are incorporated in the

work -- and subject to compliance with all applicable requirements of the Contract

Documents.

c. “REVISE AND RESUBMIT” -- indicates that Architect has noted nonconforming work on

the submittal, and/or desires clarification on some aspects of the submittal; the Contractor

must make revisions and resubmit. Contractor may not proceed with the work described in

the submittal.

d. “REJECTED” -- indicates that Architect believes the submittal contains significant error or

nonconformance and is, therefore, rejected. A new submittal is required. Contractor may

not proceed with that portion of the Work described by the submittal.

3. Where a submittal does not require Architect’s action, the submittal will be returned, marked “Action

Not Required” or “Not Reviewed”.

H. Architect will retain one copy of each submittal for Architect’s file and one copy for each major consultant who

has reviewed the submittal, unless otherwise noted.

I. When appropriate Architect will return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Product Data includes standard preprinted information on materials, products, equipment, and

systems; not specially-prepared for this Project, other than the designation of selections from among

available choices printed therein.

2. Product Data permits Architect to determine which materials, products, and systems will be accepted

in the project.

3. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use,

submit as “Shop Drawings”.

4. Preparation:

a. Collect required data into one coordinated submittal for each unit of work, element of

construction or system.

b. Mark the manufacturer’s brochures and catalog data to clearly indicate the items to be

included as a part of the work. Product Data submitted with multiple items and no clear

indication as to which item is to be used in the work will be returned to Contractor without

being reviewed.

c. Mark all submittals indicating item, options, and finishes proposed, and referencing

technical Specification Section and paragraph covering the work in question.

d. Use same equipment, fixture, or item reference used in the Contract Documents.




01 33 00 - 6

e. Include the following as appropriate:

1) Manufacturer’s standard printed recommendations for application, installation and

use. Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable

to the Project.

2) Physical dimensions and clearances required. Indicate field dimensions that have

been checked and verified.

3) Performance characteristics, limitations and capacities.

4) Structural, mechanical and electrical engineering information.

5) Conformance with applicable standards, codes, fire ratings and acoustical ratings.

6) Test data.

7) Appearance characteristics.

8) Samples of color and finishes.

f. Identify coordination requirements.

g. Manufacturer’s standard schematic drawings and diagrams:

1) Modify the drawings and other diagrams to delete information that is not applicable

to the Work.

2) Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to

the Work.

h. Identify deviations from the Contract Documents by clouding and the words “CONTRACT

DEVIATION” in bold face print.

i. Identify each document with information required in the paragraph entitled “Submittal

Identification”.

j. Statements such as “as specified” will not suffice.

5. Submittal:

a. Submit six copies of Product Data.

b. Heat transfer or other impermanent reproduction method or fading type of reproduction will

not be accepted.

c. Two copies of reviewed Product Data will be returned to Contractor.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop Drawings facilitate integration, coordination, and progress of the Work.

2. Shop Drawings include fabrication, erection, and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules,

patterns, templates, and similar drawings.

3. Shop Drawings include specially-prepared technical data for this Project, including drawings,

diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations,

instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard printed form for general

application to a range of similar projects. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by Contractor or through

Contractor by way of a subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower tier

contractor, to illustrate a portion of the work.

4. Submit shop drawings when specified and to illustrate every custom fabricated item or assembly.

5. Preparation:

a. Provide newly prepared information with graphic information at accurate scale, except as

otherwise noted. Do not reproduce Contract Documents and do not copy standard

information as basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific

reference to the project is not considered Shop Drawings.

b. Include plans, sections, and details complete with information for making connections with

other work and any other information necessary to adequately describe the unit of Work.

c. Identify materials, products, and finishes and, where applicable, use specification section

numbers as reference.

d. Identify details by reference to Contract Drawings drawing and detail, schedule, or room

numbers shown or specified.

e. Use same equipment, fixture, or item reference used in the Contract Documents.

f. Identify applicable standards.

g. Identify coordination requirements.




01 33 00 - 7

h. Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings, and indicate which are based

on field measurement. Prepare dimensioned drawings to scale.

i. Identify deviations from the Contract Documents by clouding and the words “CONTRACT

DEVIATION” in boldface type or lettering.

j. Shop Drawings shall be not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30 by 42 inches,

unless approved in advance by Architect.

k. Where coordination requirements necessitate scope of Shop Drawing to include more than

one item, label Shop Drawing with specification section number of dominant trade involved.

“Dominant” shall be defined as greatest quantity, greatest cost, or principal detail subject of

drawing, whichever may be appropriate.

l. Draw Shop Drawings at large scale, fully detailed and with all materials and stock or

purchased components fully identified.

6. Submission:

a. For Shop Drawings presented on sheets larger than 11 inches by 17 inches two opaque

reproductions of each required shop drawing prepared for this project. Shop drawings can

be no larger than Typical Contract Drawings without prior of approval of Architect.

1) Transmit reproducibles rolled in mailing tubes. Do not fold reproducibles.

2) Bind Shop Drawings in sets.

3) Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision numbers and

dates, in addition to the information required in the paragraph entitled “Submittals

Identification”.

4) Each drawing shall have clear space of approximately 4 by 10 inches to receive

review stamps.

5) One copy of reviewed Shop Drawings will be returned to Contractor.

b. For shop drawings presented on sheets 8-1/2 inches by 14 inches or less, conform to the

format and quantity requirements for Product Data.

C. Samples:

1. Samples include both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of products, materials, products

equipment, fixtures, devices, assemblies, or workmanship, physically identical to a portion of the

Work, illustrating a portion of the Work or establishing standards for evaluating the appearance of the

finished Work or both or (where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis. Mock-ups are a

special form of samples, which are too large or otherwise inconvenient for handling in specified

manner for transmittal of sample submittals.

2. Review of Samples shall permit Architect to physically verify conformance of materials, products,

fixtures, devices, assemblies, or workmanship with Contract Documents either by inspection or

testing, and to select textures, colors, or other characteristics as stipulated in the Contract Documents.

a. Review of Samples will be only for characteristics or uses named in such review and shall

not be taken to change or modify any contract requirement except as specifically authorized

or requested by Architect.

b. Samples shall set standards for items or characteristics of which Samples are representative.

3. After a sample has been accepted, no change in brand, manufacturer, or quality will be permitted

unless satisfactory written evidence is presented to, and accepted by, Architect that the manufacturer

cannot make scheduled delivery of the accepted material, or that the material delivered has been

rejected and substitution of suitable materials is an urgent necessity.

4. Refer to technical Specification Sections for additional requirements of samples, if any, which are

intended for examinations or testing for other characteristics.

5. Format and Quantity of Samples:

a. Furnish samples in the sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the manufacturer has

prepackaged samples of approximately the same size as specified:

1) Sample of equipment or device: Full size.

2) Sample of materials less than 2 by 3 inches: Attach to an 8-1/2 by 11 inch sheet.

3) Sample of materials exceeding 8-1/2 by 11 inches: Cut down to 8-1/2 by 11 inches

as appropriate to indicate color, texture, and material variations.




01 33 00 - 8

4) Sample of linear devices or materials, such as, conduit and handrails: 10-inch

length or length to be supplied, if less than 10 inches.

5) Sample of non-solid materials, such as, sand and paint: Pint.

6) Color selection samples: 2 inches by 4 inches.

7) Sample panel: 4 feet by 4 feet.

8) Sample installation: 100 square feet.

9) Sizes of samples shall be of their respective standard unit, insofar as possible or

practical, unless otherwise noted.

10) Refer to Section 09 91 00 – Painting for paint color sample requirements

b. Samples showing range of variation: Where variations are unavoidable due to the nature of

the materials, submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing the extremes and

middle of the range.

c. Where Samples are for selecting of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a

range of standard choices, submit a full set of choices for the material or product.

d. Quantity, unless otherwise specified:

1) Submit three samples, or three sets of samples showing range of variation, of each

required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by Architect

and two will be returned to Contractor.

2) Submit one sample panel. Include components listed in technical Specification

Section or as directed.

3) Submit one sample installation, where directed.

4) Submit one sample of non-solid materials.

e. Mount, display, or package samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities

indicated.

f. Identify each Sample with information required by the paragraph entitled “Submittal

Identification”. Also, include information with each Sample to show generic description,

source or product name and manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with standards.

g. Refer to technical Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate

workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and

similar construction characteristics.

6. Requirements for Mock-Ups and Field Samples:

a. Mock-ups and similar field samples specified in technical Specifications Sections are

recognized as a special type of Sample. Comply with requirements for “samples” to greatest

extent possible, and process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.

b. Erect at site in locations acceptable to Architect.

c. Construct each mock-up or field sample; include all items required in the finish work.

d. Mock-ups or field samples shall remain in place until the work it represents has been

completed and accepted by Architect.

e. Note and preserve the notation of the area constituting the sample installation but remove the

notation at the final clean up of the Project.

7. Quality Control Set of Samples:

a. Maintain returned final set of Samples at project site, properly protected and in suitable

condition and available for quality control comparisons by Architect and others.

b. Quality control set shall serve as the basis for comparison for following work, and shall

establish the standard of color, pattern, texture, workmanship, and other qualities as

applicable when in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

8. Reusable Samples: Returned Samples that are intended or permitted to be incorporated in the Work

are so indicated in other Specification Sections.

9. Incorporated Samples must be undamaged at the time of use and in complete conformance with all

requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:

1. When specified in technical Specification Sections, submit manufacturers’ printed instructions for

delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect for delivery to

Owner in quantities specified for Product Data.




01 33 00 - 9

2. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special

environmental criteria required for application or installation.

3. Identify conflicts between manufacturers’ instructions and Contract Documents.

4. Installation of the items will not be allowed to proceed until the information is received. Failure to

furnish the information can be cause for rejection of the material.

E. Manufacturer’s Field Reports:

1. Submit reports for Architect’s benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.

2. Submit report in duplicate within 5 days of observation to Architect for information.

3. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and

design concept expressed in Contract Documents.






Special Procedures

01 35 00 - 1

SECTION 01 35 00 - SPECIAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: The requirements for the following subjects are covered in this Section.

1. Construction Procedures Plan.

2. Contractors Site Safety and Health Plan.

3. Environmental Protection Plan.

4. Disposal Operations.

5. Cultural Resources.

1.2 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES PLAN

A. Within 15 days of award of contract, submit to Architect a proposed Construction Procedures Plan

demonstrating how the provisions of this section and of all other requirements of the Contract Documents

are to be implemented so as to provide the minimum possible disturbance to residents from noise, traffic,

and vibration to adjacent structures. The plan must be approved before work is started, and shall include,

but not be limited to, the following:

1. Sequence of operations.

2. Environmental Protection Plan as described in this Section.

3. Noise Control: Refer to Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls for noise control

requirements.

4. Dust Control: Refer to Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities and Controls for dust control

requirements.

5. Smoke/odor control plan.

6. Site Plan showing public protection such as pedestrian covered walkways, barriers, flagman locations,

truck access, and similar items.

7. Waste, debris, and rubbish removal procedures.

8. Trucking plan describing traffic routes and procedures for transporting debris.

9. Street cleanup plan.

10. MSDS Safety Data Sheets for any chemicals proposed to be used.

11. Utility shut off and capping plan.

12. Vibration control plan.

B. Refer to other specification sections for specific requirements concerning some of the items that are noted to

be included in the Construction Procedures Plan.

1.3 CONTRACTOR’S SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH PLAN

A. Contractor shall be the “Controlling Employer”, throughout the duration of the construction of the Project. As

the “Controlling Employer”, Contractor is responsible for the following:

1. All site safety and health conditions at the Project;

2. Correcting any and all hazards which may endanger any person’s health or safety while rightfully

working on the Project;

3. Initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety programs in connection with the Work;

4. Conducting daily safety inspections of the site to ensure that its subcontractors and any other

employees working on the Project, whether working directly for Contractor or Owner, are not in

violation of any CAL/OSHA regulations;

5. Providing written notice demanding immediate correction of any safety violation to each and every

subcontractor or employee, whether working directly for Contractor or Owner, working on the Project

who is either responsible for exposing employees to the hazard, creating the hazard, or correcting the

hazard; and



Special Procedures

01 35 00 - 2

6. Notifying and complying with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any

public authority bearing on the safety of persons rightfully on the Project.

B. Contractor shall develop and keep on the project site at all times a Site Safety and Health Plan (SSHP) that

fulfills the requirements set forth in the California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 8 Section 3203 Injury and

Illness Prevention Program (Cal/OSHA General Industry Standard) and CCR Tile 8 Section 1509 (Cal/OSHA

Construction Safety Orders).

C. The SSHP shall address all site-specific topics pertinent to maintaining a safe and healthy work environment

which may include, but is not limited to: safety organization and responsibilities; meetings and inspections;

emergency and evacuation plans; hazardous material spill response; incident investigation, reporting and record

keeping; training; first aid; hazard communication; housekeeping; noise; personal protective equipment; fire

prevention and protection; confined space entry; electrical safety and lockout/tagout; welding, torch cutting and

hot work permitting; hand and portable power tools; cranes, heavy equipment, forklifts and motor vehicles;

ladders, scaffolds and elevated platforms; guarding of floor and wall openings; fall protection; excavation and

trenching; pressurized cylinders; material handling and storage; ventilation; personal hygiene, sanitation and

chemical toilets.

D. The SSHP shall include an MSDS for each product used at the work site.

E. The SSHP shall describe measures that Contractor will implement to ensure the safety of people and visitors

who are in adjacent occupied building spaces, on public thoroughfares, or who are otherwise in close proximity

to the construction activities. The SSHP shall also address security measures that will be used to prevent

unauthorized entry to the site.

F. Contractor shall ensure that all Subcontractors, vendors, visitors or others entering or working at the project site

comply with applicable SSHP provisions.

G. Contractor shall comply with Title 87 of the California Fire Code for fire safety during construction, alteration

or demolition of a building

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN

A. During the progress of the work, keep the premises occupied in a neat and clean condition and protect the

environment both on site and off site, throughout and upon completion of the construction project.

B. Develop an Environmental Protection Plan in detail and submit to Architect within 30 days from the date of

commencement specified in the Notice to Proceed. Distribute the approved plan to all employees and to all

subcontractors and their employees. The Environmental Protection Plan shall include, but not be limited to, the

following items:

1. Copies of required permits and procedures agreed upon with City, County, and other regulatory

agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Proposed sanitary landfill site.

3. Other proposed disposal sites.

4. Noise Controls: Refer to Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls for noise control

requirements.

5. Dust Controls: Refer to Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls for dust control

requirements.

6. Erosion Controls: Refer to Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls for erosion control

requirements.

7. Copies of any agreements with public or private landowners regarding equipment, materials storage,

borrow sites, fill sites, or disposal sites. Any such agreement made by Contractor shall be invalid if its

execution causes violation of local or regional grading or land use regulations.



Special Procedures

01 35 00 - 3

C. Requirements: All operations shall comply with all federal, state and local regulations pertaining to water, air,

solid waste and noise pollution.

D. Definitions of Contaminants:

1. Sediment: Soil and other debris that have been eroded and transported by runoff water.

2. Solid Waste: Rubbish, debris, garbage and other discarded solid materials resulting from construction

activities, including a variety of combustible and non-combustible wastes, such as ashes, waste

materials that result from construction or maintenance and repair work, leaves and tree trimmings.

3. Chemical Waste: Includes petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalis, herbicides,

pesticides, disinfectants, organic chemicals and inorganic wastes. Some of the above may be

classified as “hazardous.”

4. Sanitary Wastes:

a. Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage.

b. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing and

consumption of food

5. Hazardous Materials: Except as otherwise specified, in the event Contractor encounters on the site

material reasonably believed to be asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or other hazardous

materials which have not been rendered harmless, Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area

affected and report the condition to Owner in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not

thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of Owner and Contractor if in fact the material is

asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the

affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials, or when

such materials have been rendered harmless.

E. Protection of Natural Resources:

1. General: It is intended that the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits

of permanent work performed under this Contract be preserved in their existing condition or be

restored to an equivalent or improved condition upon completion of the work. Confine construction

activities to areas defined by the public roads, easements, and work area limits shown on the

Drawings. Return construction areas to their pre-construction elevations except where surface

elevations are otherwise noted to be changed. Maintain natural drainage patterns. Conduct

construction activities such that ponding or stagnant water conducive to mosquito breeding habitat

will not occur at anytime.

2. Land Resources: Do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy trees or shrubs outside the work area

limits. Do not remove, deface, injure, or destroy trees within the work area without permission from

Architect. Such improvements shall be removed and replaced, if required, by Contractor at his own

expense.

a. Protection: Protect trees that are located near the limits of Contractor’s work areas which

may possibly be defaced, bruised or injured or otherwise damaged by Contractor’s

operations. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened to or be attached to any existing

nearby trees or shrubs for anchorage.

b. Trimming: Refer to Section 01 56 39 - Temporary Tree and Plant Protection.

c. Excavation Around Trees: Refer to Section 01 56 39 - Temporary Tree and Plant Protection.

d. Repair or Restoration: Repair or replace any trees or other landscape feature scarred or

damaged by equipment or construction operations as specified below. The repair and

restoration plan shall be reviewed and approved by Architect prior to its initiation.

e. Temporary Construction: Remove all signs of temporary construction facilities such as haul

roads, work areas, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or

waste materials, or any other vestiges of construction as directed by Architect. Level all

temporary roads, parking areas, and any other areas that have become compacted or shaped.

Any unpaved areas where vehicles are operated shall receive a suitable surface treatment or

shall be periodically wetted down to prevent construction operations from producing dust

damage and nuisance to persons and property, at no additional cost to Owner. Keep haul

roads clear at all times of any object that creates an unsafe condition. Promptly remove any

contaminants or construction material dropped from construction vehicles. Do not drop mud



Special Procedures

01 35 00 - 4

and debris from construction equipment on public streets. Sweep clean turning areas and

pavement entrances as necessary.

3. Water Resources: Investigate and comply with all applicable federal, state and local regulations

concerning the discharge (directly or indirectly) of pollutants to the underground and natural waters.

Perform all work under this Contract in such a manner that any adverse environmental impacts are

reduced to a level that is acceptable to Architect and regulatory agencies. Refer to Section 02300 -

Earthwork, paragraph on control of water for “dewatering” water disposal requirements.

a. Oily Substances: At all times, special measures shall be taken to prevent oily or other

hazardous substances from entering the ground, drainage areas or local bodies of water in

such quantities as to affect normal use, aesthetics or produce a measurable impact upon the

area. Any soil or water that is contaminated with oily substances due to Contractor’s

operations shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations.

1.5 DISPOSAL OPERATIONS

A. The following requirements are in addition to requirement specified in Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste

Management and Disposal.

B. Solid Waste Management: Supply solid waste transfer containers. Daily remove all debris such as spent air

filters, oil cartridges, cans, bottles, combustibles and litter. Take care to prevent trash and papers from blowing

onto adjacent property. Encourage personnel to use refuse containers. Convey contents to a sanitary landfill.

C. Washing of concrete containers where wastewater may reach adjacent property, storm drains or natural

watercourses will not be permitted. Remove any excess concrete to the sanitary landfill.

D. Chemical Waste and Hazardous Materials Management: Furnish containers for storage of spent chemicals

used during construction operations. Dispose of chemicals and hazardous materials in accordance with

applicable regulations.

E. Garbage: Store garbage in covered containers; pick up daily and dispose of in a sanitary landfill.

F. Dispose of vegetation, weeds, rubble, and other materials removed by the clearing, stripping and grubbing

operations off site at a suitable disposal site in accordance with applicable regulations.

G. Excavated Materials:

1. Native soil complying with the requirements of Division 31 may be used for backfill, fill and

embankments as allowed by that section.

2. Spoil Material: Remove all material, which is excavated in excess of that, required for backfill, and

such excavated material, which is unsuitable for backfill, from the site.

a. Excess suitable backfill material shall be hauled off site. No additional compensation will be

paid to the Contractor for such off haul. Include all such costs in the lump sum prices bid for

the project.

b. Unsuitable backfill material will be disposed of off site in accordance with applicable

regulations, in a disposal site indicated in the Environmental Protection Plan. Remove

rubbish and materials unsuitable for backfill immediately following excavation. Remove

material in excess of that required for backfill immediately following backfill operations.

H. Rubbish shall consist of all materials not classified as suitable materials or rubble and shall include shrubbery,

trees, timber, trash, and garbage.

1.6 CULTURAL RESOURCES

A. The project does not pass through any known archaeological sites. However, it is conceivable that unrecorded

archaeological sites could be discovered during construction.



Special Procedures

01 35 00 - 5

B. In the event that artifacts, human remains, or other cultural resources are discovered during subsurface

excavations at locations of the Work, Contractor shall protect the discovered items, cease work for a distance of

35 feet radius in the area, notify Architect and comply with applicable law.

C. Owner may retain an Archaeologist to monitor and recover data and artifacts during period work has ceased.

D. All items found which are considered to have archaeological significance are the property of Owner.






Regulatory Requirements

01 41 00 - 1

SECTION 01 41 00 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: This Section sets forth certain codes, standards, and relevant requirements applicable

to the work required under this Contract.

1.2 STATUTORY AND JURISDICTIONAL REGULATIONS

A. Perform the Work in accordance with Applicable Code Requirements and applicable requirements of all other

regulatory agencies listed on Drawing No. G1.0.

B. Unless otherwise specified, specific references to codes, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s instruction, or

requirements of regulatory agencies, when used to specify requirements for materials or design elements, shall

mean the latest edition of each in effect on the date of Contract Documents or date of the Change Order or

Field Order, as applicable, except where a specific date is established by codes.

1.3 JOB SITE PUBLICATIONS

A. Contractor shall maintain codes and regulatory requirement publications, as indicated in the individual

Specification Sections, of the appropriate publication date, on the Site during construction.

1.4 CONFLICTS

A. If a conflict exists between referenced regulatory requirements or between referenced regulatory

requirements and the Contract Documents, Contractor shall notify Architect and request that the conflict be

resolved.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Conflicts: If a conflict exists between referenced regulatory requirements, comply with more stringent

establishing requirement, unless otherwise directed by Architect.






References

01 42 00 - 1

SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: The requirements for abbreviations, definitions, reference standards, and symbols.

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Abbreviations, used on the Drawings, are listed thereon.

B. The following abbreviations of organizations may be used in the Contract Documents:

AABC Associated Air Balance Council

AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers’ Association

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

ACI American Concrete Institute

AIA American Institute of Architects

AIMA Acoustical and Insulation Materials Association

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association

ANSI American National Standards Institute (formerly American Standards

Association, ASA)

APA American Plywood Association

ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning

Engineers

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

AWI American Woodwork Institute

AWPA American Wood Preservers’ Association

AWS American Welding Society

AWWA American Water Works Association

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association

CAC State of California Administrative Code (Same as CCR)

CBC California Building Code

CCR California Code of Regulations

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers’ Institute

CPM Critical Path Method

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

CSS State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of

Public Works, Division of Highways’ “Standard Specifications”

DSA Division of the State Architect

ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories

FM Factory Mutual System, Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation

FS Federal Specifications

GANA Glass Association of North America (formerly Flat Glass Marketing

Association)

IPCEA Institute of Power Cable Engineers Association

MM State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of

Public Works, Division of Highways’ “Materials Manual”



References

01 42 00 - 2

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau

NEC National Electric Code

NEMA National Electric Manufacturers’ Association

NETA National Electrical Testing Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

OSA Office of the State Architect

OSHPD Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development

OSHA Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act

PS United States Department of Commerce Product Standard

RIS Redwood Inspection Service

SFM State of California, Office of State Fire Marshal

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

SMC State of California Mechanical Code

SPC State of California Administrative Code

TCA Tile Council of America

UL Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.

USS United States Standard

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau

WH Warnock Hersey

WI Woodwork Institute

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following terms, when used on the Drawings or in the Specifications, shall have the following meanings:

TERM MEANING

As directed - “As directed by Architect”

As required - “As required by Applicable Code Requirements; by good

building practice; by the condition prevailing; by the Contract

Documents; by Owner; or by Architect”

As selected - “As selected by Architect”

By others - Work on the Project that is outside the scope of Work to be

preformed by Contractor under the Contract, but that will be

performed by Owner Separate Contractors, or other means.

Equal - Of same quality, appearance, and utility to that specified, as

determined by Architect. Contractor bears the burden of proof

of equality.

Furnish - “Supply only, not install”

Install - “Install or apply only, not furnish”

Owner-furnished, - “To be furnished by Owner at its cost and installed by

Contractor-installed Contractor as part of the Work”

Project - Total construction of which Work performed under

Contract Documents may be the whole or apart.

Project site - Geographical location of the Project.



References

01 42 00 - 3

Provide - “Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use”

Shown - “As indicated on the Drawings”

Specified - “As written in the Contract Documents”

Submit - “Submit to Architect”

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standard, comply with

requirements of the standard, except when requirements that are more rigid are specified or are required by

applicable codes.

B. Applicable standards of the construction industry have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the

Contract documents by reference) as if copied directly into the Contract documents, or as if published

copies were bound herewith.

C. Unless otherwise specified, specific references to referenced standard, when used to specify requirements for

materials or design elements, shall mean the latest edition in effect on the date of Contract Documents or date

of the Change Order or Field Order, as applicable, except where a specific date is established code.

D. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

E. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the

Architect before proceeding.

F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of

Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference

document.

1.5 SYMBOLS

A. Symbols, used only on the Drawings, are shown thereon.






Quality Assurance

01 43 00 - 1

SECTION 01 43 00 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: General requirements for quality assurance.

B. Included in Other Sections:

1. Requirements for tests and inspections.

C. Not in Contract: Costs of testing and inspecting unless otherwise noted.

1.2 LABELING

A. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction for products, assemblies, and systems

required to be labeled by applicable code.

B. Label Information: Include manufacturer's or fabricator's identification, approved agency identification, and

the following information, as applicable, on each label.

1. Model number.

2. Serial number.

3. Performance characteristics.

1.3 SUPPLIER’S AND MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers

to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation,

quality of workmanship.

B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer

subject to approval of Architect.

C. Representatives to provide recommendation, certifications and other specified services.

D. Representatives shall submit written report to Architect listing observations and recommendations.

E. Representatives to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers

that are supplemental or contrary to suppliers’ and manufacturers' written instructions.






Mockup Requirements

01 43 39 - 1

SECTION 01 43 39 - MOCKUP REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: Administrative and procedural requirements for mockups.


1. Developing a schedule of required mockups.

2. Description of mockups involving the work of only one section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to

verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated,

qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are

not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of

construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for

the completed Work:

1. Construct mockups required by this section “out of sequence” with respect to normal construction

sequence and obtain approval by Architect before commencing the work represented by the mock-up.

2. Construct mockups at the building site in locations and of sizes indicated or, if not indicated, as

directed by Architect.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

4. Use products, materials, finishes, fabrication methods, details, anchorage systems, and construction

methods identical with those required for the Work. Use supervisor who will be involved in actual

construction.

5. Simulate fabrication and installation, as nearly as feasible, the actual fabrication and installation in the

completed structure.

6. Correct work installed within a mock-up, which is not acceptable to Architect’s at no additional cost

to Owner. Correct subsequent installations elsewhere in the project, which are not in accordance with

an approved mock-up at no additional cost to Owner.

7. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

8. Obtain Architect’s approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

9. Maintain mockups during construction in clean and an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

10. Each item of work within a mock-up must be approved by Architect before commencing work

represented by a mock-up.

11. Architect's approval of a mock-up will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for any deviation

from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has specifically informed

Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of the review and Architect has given written

approval of the specific deviation.




Mockup Requirements

01 43 39 - 2





Quality Control

01 45 00 - 1

SECTION 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: The requirements for the following quality control subjects are covered in this

Section.

1. Control of Installation.

2. Tolerances.

3. Testing and Inspection Laboratory Services.

4. Contractor’s Responsibilities.

5. Additional Testing and Inspections.

6. Testing and Inspection Reports.

7. Job Conditions.

8. Repair and Protection.

B. Included in Other Sections:

1. Requirements for specific tests and inspections.

2. Designation of work to be tested and inspected.

C. Not in Contract: Costs of testing and inspecting unless otherwise noted.

1.2 CONTROL OF INSTALLATIONS

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship,

to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from {Architect

before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances,

codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

G. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,

vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.

H. Multiple Tests and Inspections: Certain portions of the Work will be tested and inspected at various stages,

sometimes off the site, between their inception and final positioning in the completed work. Nothing in any

prior approval or satisfactory test result shall govern if at any subsequent time the Work or portion thereof, is

found not to conform to the Contract Documents.

I. If Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or make acceptances required by the Contract Documents, Architect

will do so promptly and, where practical, at the normal place of testing.

J. Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid

unreasonable delay in the Work.



Quality Control

01 45 00 - 2

1.3 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not

permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract

Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

C. Adjust Products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

1.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION LABORATORY SERVICES

A. Owner’s Testing Agency:

1. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent firm to perform material reviews, testing,

and inspections required in Contract Documents.

2. Owner’s Testing Agency is not authorized to:

a. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on the requirements of the Contract Documents.

b. Approve or accept any portion of the Work, or;

c. Perform any duties of Contractor.

3. Owner’s Testing Agency will:

a. Perform testing and inspections as required by applicable regulation as indicated in the

specification Sections, and as directed by Architect.

b. Prepare, cure, store, and transport samples to the laboratory.

B. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory: Testing laboratory retained and paid for by Contractor to perform testing

services required by the Contract documents. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory shall be an Independent

organization other than Owner’s Testing Agency, acceptable to Architect. It may be a commercial testing

organization, the testing laboratory of a trade association, the certified laboratory of a supplier, the contractor’s

own forces, or other organization. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory shall have performed testing of the type

specified for at least five years.

C. Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer:

1. Owner will employ and pay for services of Geotechnical Engineer for performing certain inspections

and testing functions required in the Contract Documents.

2. Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer will communicate only with Owner and Architect. Architect will then

give notice to Contractor, with a copy to Owner, of any action required of Contractor.

D. Qualifications of Testing Agents: Agencies, bureaus, or laboratories shall be acceptable to Architect.

E. Failure of Materials and Equipment Tested or Inspected:

1. Contractor will be charged for retesting and reinspection resulting from Contractor’s noncompliance

with the Contract as evidenced by tests and inspections by Owner’s Testing Agency.

2. Previous acceptance may be withdrawn and material of which tested Samples are representative or

equipment may be subject to removal and replacement by Contractor at its expense with material or

equipment meeting specification requirements.

3. Architect may refuse consideration of further Samples of same brand or make for testing.

4. At Owner’s discretion, defective material and equipment may be permitted to remain in place subject

to adjustment of Contract price.


A. Cooperate with testing and inspection personnel and provide access to the Work, including off-site

manufacturer’s and fabricator’s operations.



Quality Control

01 45 00 - 3

B. Provide required quantities material samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing. Samples

will be selected and taken by representative of Owner’s Testing Agency.

C. Submit to Owner’s Testing Agency the preliminary design mixes proposed to be used for concrete and other

materials that require review by Owner’s Agency.

D. Submit copies of product test reports as specified.

E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to Work to be tested;

2. To obtain and handle samples at the site or source of products to be tested;

3. To facilitate tests and inspections, and;

4. For storage and curing of test samples at the Project site.

F. When tests or inspections are not performed after such notice, Contractor shall reimburse Owner’s Testing

Agency for the cost of personnel and travel expenses incurred.

G. Pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor’s use.

H. Contractor shall be responsible for the premium costs for required inspections of materials being fabricated

more than 75 miles from the Project Site. These costs shall include additional travel time as well as per diem

and travel expenses.

1.6 ADDITIONAL TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

A. If initial tests or inspections made by Owner’s Testing Agency or Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer reveal that

any portion of the Work does not comply with the Contract Documents, or if Architect determines that any

portion of the Work requires additional testing or inspection, perform additional testing and inspections as

directed.

B. If such additional tests or inspections establish that such portion of the Work complies with Contract

Documents, all costs of such additional testing will be paid for by Owner.

C. If such additional tests or inspections establish that such portion of the Work fails to comply with the Contract

Documents, all costs of such additional tests and inspections, and all other costs resulting from such failure,

including compensation for Architect shall be deducted from Contract Sum.

1.7 TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS

A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of reports which include:

1. Date issued,

2. Project name,

3. Architect’s Project Number,

4. Architect’s name,

5. Name of Inspector from inspection or testing agency,

6. Date and time of sampling or inspection,

7. Identification of product and specification section,

8. Type of inspection or test,

9. Date of test,

10. Results of tests,

11. Conformance with Contract Documents,

12. Whether original test or re-test.



Quality Control

01 45 00 - 4

B. Distribution of Reports: Distribute copies of all reports, indicating observations and results of tests and

indicating compliance or noncompliance with the Contract Documents, as follows.

1. Architect: One copy.

2. Owner: Three copies.

3. Architect’s Consultants, as appropriate: One copy each.

4. Local Jurisdiction where applicable.

5. Those affected by the report: One copy each.

6. The number of copies for Contractor and Supplier being tested will be determined upon

commencement of the Contract.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS

A. When Contractor’s methods of operation result in excessive test and inspection costs to Owner and if after

warning, costs remain excessive; Contractor shall defray costs attributable to their methods of operation.

B. Scheduling:

1. Make tests and inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents promptly to avoid

unreasonable delay in the Work.

2. Notify Architect and Owner’s Testing Agency 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring

inspection and testing services.

3. Make tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or

by applicable code requirements at appropriate times. Except as otherwise provided, arrange for such

tests, inspections, and approvals with the Contractor’s Testing Laboratory. Give Architect written

notice within 7 calendar days of when and where tests and inspections are to be made.

4. Cooperate with testing program as necessary to avoid delays. When material or work is not ready at

times scheduled for tests and inspections, be responsible for costs of additional tests and inspections

occasioned by delays.

5. Premium time fees for testing performed after regular working hours or on Saturday, Sunday, or on

legal holidays shall be reimbursed by Contractor except when testing is required for Owner-requested

overtime work.

C. Completed Work: Should Architect require tests and inspections for work completed before final acceptance of

entire work, furnish necessary facilities, labor, and materials to uncover or remove work in question to extent

necessary.

1. If such work is found defective due to fault of Contractor, Contractor shall defray expense of removal,

tests, and inspections, and satisfactory reconstruction. Time extension may not be granted.

2. If such work is found to conform to requirements of the Contract, Contractor shall be reimbursed by

Owner for facilities, labor, and materials required for removal, and costs of satisfactory reconstruction

in accordance with the Contract for amounts for extra work and time extension.

1.9 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Upon completion of testing, inspecting, sample-taking, and similar services performed on the work, repair

damaged work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in the visual

qualities of exposed finishes.

B. Protect work exposed by or for quality control services activities, and protect repair work.

C. Repair and protection is Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for testing,

inspecting, or similar services.




Quality Control

01 45 00 - 5




Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included in this Section: Providing, maintaining, and removing of facilities and controls required to

execute work of this Project efficiently and successfully including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Temporary Utilities:

a. Temporary Electricity. b. Temporary Water. c. Temporary Lighting.

2. Equipment. 3. Temporary Fire Protection. 4. Construction Facilities:

a. Field Offices and Sheds. b. Sanitation Facilities. c. Construction Staging Area.

5. Temporary Construction: a. Access Provisions. b. Site Barriers.

6. Construction Aids: a. Debris Box.

7. Vehicular Access and Parking: a. Parking Areas.

8. Temporary Controls: a. Storm Water Pollution Control. b. Moisture Control. c. Dust Control. d. Noise Control. e. Sewer Sediment Control. f. Water Control g. Erosion Control. h. Pollution Control i. Pest Control. j. Rodent Control.

9. Temporary Signage: a. Project Identification Sign. b. Project Informational Sign.

10. Removal of Utilities, Facilities and Controls. B. Related Work Not Included in this Section:

1. Provision of protective measures described with respect to specific unit of work. 2. Provision of shoring for cast-in-place concrete. 3. Provision of temporary tree and plant protection.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. 2. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 3. NFPA 37 - Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas

Turbines. 4. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.



1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data describing products only as requested by Architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Engineer: Where required for engineering temporary facilities or aiding in construction, employ

Structural Engineer licensed in State of California, other than Structural Engineer of Record. B. Temporary Facilities and Controls:

1. The requirement and procedures set forth in this Section are based primarily on NFPA 241. 2. Cooperation with Owner’s personnel is required, and sufficient notice shall be given prior to start

of any work, which will interfere in any way with the use of the property. 3. Take precautions at all times to protect persons, including Contractor’s employees, subcontractor’s

and their employees affected in any way by the Work; especially guard against or eliminate hazardous conditions.

4. Adequate for intended use and for loads imposed without excessive settlement, deflection, or deformation.

5. Properly support, wedge, and secure temporary facilities to prevent displacement or failure. 6. Do not create unsafe conditions or violate Applicable Code Requirements.

C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Permits and Fees: Secure and pay for all permits and fees required for temporary facilities and controls.

2. Temporary Facilities and Controls: Comply with State and City ordinances, statutes, laws, rules, and regulations relating to same and with authorities and insurance companies having jurisdiction.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for proper

performance of the Work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need.

B. Conditions of Use:

1. Install, operate, maintain, and protect temporary facilities in a manner and at locations, which will be safe, non-hazardous, sanitary, protective of persons and property, and free of deleterious effects.

2. Remove and replace any components of temporary facilities that are not suitable for intended use. 3. Temporary facilities of any nature exposed to public view to present a neat, clean attractive

appearance. C. Maintain job site in neat and clean condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide those materials incidental to providing construction facilities and executing controls. B. Used materials for protection enclosures are acceptable if approved by Architect and if adequate for required

purposes, otherwise new materials will be required. C. Construction materials are to be non-combustible. Polyethylene is to be fire-retardant reinforced with glass

fibers and listed by Underwriters Laboratories.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ensure temporary facility and control requirements have been reviewed, approved, and ready for installation

prior to beginning work. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. General:

1. Provide and maintain temporary utilities of any nature required for construction or temporary occupancy until completion of the Work. Include arrangements for and payment of charges for temporary or permanent piping footage required for installation of utilities by utility companies.

2. Materials may be new or used, but shall be adequate for the required purposes. Their use and methods of installation shall not create unsafe conditions or violate requirements of Applicable Code Requirements.

3. Provide any new utility services to site, connection to utility sources and distribution of utilities for any purpose.

4. Provide utility reduction items such as transformers and reducing valves, connections to utility sources, and distribution of utilities.

5. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 22 – Plumbing and Division 26 - Electrical.

6. Maintain and operate systems to provide continuous service. 7. Modify and extend systems as required. 8. Removal and Reconditioning: Remove temporary utilities installed as a requirement of the Contract

Documents. Restore utilities to their original condition at the completion of the Work. 9. Inspections: Unscheduled site inspections will be made to ensure maintenance of equipment and

compliance with Specifications. B. Temporary Electricity:

1. Temporary power in not available from PG&E. Provide portable engine generator capable of providing the required electricity to the construction site. Verify location with the construction management team and owner prior to locating generator in field.

2. Provide a sound –attenuation enclosure around generator to maintain noise levels of 45-72 dB(A). C. Temporary Water:

1. Arrange and payfor temporary water from utility source as needed for site construction. 2. Provide all equipment including metering, connections, and other materials necessary for the

extending of the utility lines to where they will be used. 3. Install piping with taps located so that water is available throughout the Project site by the use of

hoses. Protect piping and fittings against freezing. 4. Provide water for human consumption in accordance with regulatory requirements for potable water.

D. Temporary Lighting:

1. Provide and maintain electrical lighting for construction operations, and areas accessible to the public when natural light is not adequate for work, to achieve a minimum lighting level of 25-foot candles on walking and working services.

2. Provide and maintain electrical lighting to exterior staging and storing areas after dark for security purposes.

3. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

4. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 3.3 EQUIPMENT



A. Internal combustion engine-powered air compressors, hoists, pumps and similar devices shall be so located that the exhausts discharge well away from combustible materials and occupied areas of hospital. When required to pipe exhaust outside the structure, piping material and clearances shall be in accordance with NFPA 37.

B. Internal combustion equipment shall be shut down and allowed to cool to ambient temperatures prior to

refueling. C. Equipment shall not be serviced or repaired within structures under construction, alteration or demolition. D. Fuel for internal combustion equipment shall not be stored within structures under construction, alteration,

or demolition. 3.4 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Develop and supervise an overall fire prevention and fire protection program. Eliminate unnecessary fire

hazards wherever possible. B. Flammable Materials:

1. Trash, debris, lumber or other materials considered to be flammable or hazardous are not to be stored or allowed to accumulate in quantities that endanger life or property.

2. Containers used for the temporary storage of combustible waste must be of solid metal, such as steel, or made of material approved by the State Fire Marshal.

3. Assign a qualified person with authority to maintain fire protection equipment, institute prevention measures, and direct the prompt removal of combustible and waste material.

4. Flammable and Combustible Liquids: a. Storage of flammable and combustible liquids shall be in accordance with NFPA 30,

except as modified by this Section. b. Storage of Class I and II liquids shall not exceed 60 gallons within 50 feet of the structure

under construction, alteration, or demolition. c. Storage areas shall be kept free of weeds, debris and combustible materials not necessary

to the storage. d. Open flames and smoking shall not be permitted in flammable and combustible liquids

storage areas. Such storage areas shall be appropriately posted as “NO SMOKING” areas.

e. Class I and II liquids shall be kept in approved safety containers. f. Means shall be provided to dispose of leakage and spills promptly and safely. g. Class I liquids shall only be dispensed where there are no open flames or other sources of

ignition within the possible path of vapor travel. C. Fire Fighting Equipment and Devices:

1. Direct access to fire hydrants, fire department connections, and fire alarm stations must be maintained at all times. Hydrants, connections, and fire alarm stations must be easily visible at all times.

2. Provide and maintain appropriate number and type of fire protection equipment including fire extinguishers, fire hoses, and other equipment suitable for type fire associated with the hazards present during course of Work.



3. Fire Extinguishers: a. Comply with applicable recommendations of NFPA 10 for each area of each construction

activity when combustible materials, flammable liquids, and similar exposures to possible fires are present.

b. Provide and maintain at least one portable ABC multi-purpose dry chemical fire extinguishers with a minimum rating of 4A-60BC throughout the area under construction and in field offices, storage sheds and other temporary structures used for construction.

4. Use fire protection equipment only for fighting fires. D. Provide spark arrestors on all internal combustion engines. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

A. Field Offices and Sheds:

1. No space or facilities on Owner’s property outside of the construction area are available for Contractor’s field office and storage sheds. Keep all materials, rubbish, debris, tools, gang boxes, and similar items within the construction area.

2. No office is required for Architect. 3. Removal: At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris.

Restore areas. B. Sanitary Facilities:

1. Existing sanitary facilities located at site may be used during construction period. Make sure sanitary facilities are used for their intended purposes and do not allow them to be used for other purposes such as dumping debris, cleaning paint brushes or similar activities.

2. Service, clean, and maintain facilities and enclosure.

C. Construction Staging Areas: 1. Parking for construction workers commuter vehicles is prohibited in construction staging area and is

subject to citation. 2. Limit storage of construction equipment and materials to construction site. 3. Do not allow oil wastes to flow onto the ground or into surface waters. Dispose of materials such as

paint, paint thinner, solvents, motor oil, fuels, resins and other environmentally deleterious substances into appropriate containers. No dumping of surplus concrete or grout on the site will be permitted.

4. Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Confine stockpiling of materials and location of storage sheds to the areas indicated. If additional storage is necessary, obtain and pay for such storage off site. Cover stockpiles of soil, sand, and other base materials.

5. Provide access to all stored materials for Owner’s inspection. 6. Existing manholes within staging, storing and working areas to remain accessible. 7. Provide access at all times for utility maintenance and repair.

3.6 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION A. Site Barriers:

1. Submittal: Submit site plan detailing location of temporary fencing, and submit product data when applicable.

2. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect the Work, existing facilities, persons, and adjacent properties from damage and injury from demolition and construction operations.

3. Provide barriers required by authorities having jurisdiction for public rights-of-ways and for public access to existing buildings.

4. Provide barrier in locations as indicated on Drawings. 5. Provide barrier not less than 7’ feet high with privacy screen fabric. Provide venting holes as

necessary to keep fences from falling down or being damaged during wind events. 6. Construction: Meet requirements of The City of Carmel-by-the-Sea Public Works director.



7. Install adequate safety devices (signs, flashers, reflectors, and barriers) as the fence is being constructed. Do not wait until after fence is completed to install safety devices.

8. Provide vehicular and pedestrian gates complete with locking devices where required. 9. Maintenance:

a. Maintain barriers during entire construction period. b. Provide continues maintenance of barricade free from debris, bushes, and planting. c. Repair immediately damage to barricades which compromises the site’s integrity or

security. d. Maintain barricades in a clean and neat and in a graffiti free condition.

10. Relocate barriers as required by progress of the Work. 11. Delineators, cones, and caution tape are unacceptable barricades.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. General:

1. Materials and installation may be new or used, suitable for the intended purpose, and in conformance with applicable regulatory requirement.

2. Completely remove construction aids when no longer required. 3. Clean and repair damages caused by installation or use of construction aids. 4. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to condition acceptable to Owner. 5. Accumulations of unnecessary combustible forms or formed lumber shall be prohibited.

Combustible forms or formed lumber shall be brought onto the project only when needed. Combustible forms or formed lumber shall be removed from the project as soon as stripping is complete. Those portions of the structure where combustible forms are present shall not be used for the storage of other combustible building materials.

6. During forming and stripping operations, portable fire extinguishers or charged hose lines shall be provided to protect adequately the additional combustible loading.

B. Debris Box:

1. Location of debris box shall be determined at Pre-Construction Meeting. 2. Remove rubbish, waste materials and debris daily. 3. Comply with all pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

3.8 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Parking: This paragraph covers requirements for construction personnel parking. Construction personnel

includes Contractor’s personnel and employees, Subcontractors and their employees, suppliers, vendors and visitors. 1. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for off-site parking for construction personnel.

3.9 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Storm Water Pollution Control:

1. Prepare a plan indicating storm water pollution prevention measure for the duration of the Project. 2. Plan shall include erosion control measures to prevent soil and debris from entering storm drain

system. 3. Ensure that concrete supply trucks or concrete/plasters finishing operation do not discharge

wastewater into street gutters or drains. B. Moisture Control:

1. Perform pumping, trenching, damming, and under draining necessary to keep site free from puddling and running water during construction.

2. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 3. Dispose of water in manner acceptable to local regulations, taking care to insure that no existing

water disposal facilities are impeded, clogged, damaged or interfered with in any way.



C. Dust Control: 1. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. 2. Employ positive measures to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

a. Wet down unpaved areas, to eliminate dust formation, a minimum of twice a day to reduce particulate matter. When wind velocity exceeds 15 mph, site shall be watered down more frequently.

b. Store all volatile liquids, including fuels or solvents in closed containers. c. No open burning of debris, lumber, or other scrap will be permitted. d. Properly maintain equipment to reduce gaseous pollutant emissions.

3. Use means necessary to control dust on and near the Work, and on and near off-site areas, if such dust is caused by Contractor’s operations during performance of the Work, or if resulting from the condition in which Contractor leaves the site.

4. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable condition, such as, flooding or pollution.

5. Cover stockpiles of soil, sand, and other loose materials. 6. Cover trucks hauling soil, debris, sand, or other loose materials. 7. Sweep project area streets at least once daily. 8. Completely cover debris, when transported, to contain dust during transport through patient care

areas. D. Noise Control:

1. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. 2. Maximum Noise Levels: The following applies to areas within 1,000 feet of any residence,

Business, Adjacent Buildings or Other Populated Area. a. Noise levels for trenchers, pavers, graders, and trucks shall not exceed 90 dBA at 50 feet as

measured under the noisiest operating conditions. b. For all other equipment, noise levels shall not exceed 85 dBA at 50 feet.

3. Equipment: a. Keep noise from job equipment to a minimum by use of adequate mufflers and other

appropriate means. b. Air compressors should be of a quiet type such as a “whisperized” compressor.

Compressor hoods shall-be closed while equipment is in operation. c. Forklifts should be electrically powered rather than gasoline or diesel powered. d. Obtain special permission to use jackhammers. Equip jackhammers with exhaust mufflers

and steel muffling sleeves. Provide portable noise barriers around jack hammering, construct barriers of 3/4 inch plywood lined with 1 inch thick acoustical fiberglass on work side.

e. Minimize use of impact wrenches for bolting torsion control bolts to connect steel structural frames.

f. Pre-cut metal decking off site to reduce on site sawing. 4. Operations: Keep noisy equipment as far as possible from noise-sensitive site boundaries. Machines

should not be left idling. Use electric power in lieu of internal combustion engine power wherever possible. Maintain equipment properly to reduce noise from excessive vibration, faulty mufflers, or other sources. All engines shall have properly functioning mufflers.

5. Scheduling: a. Schedule noisy operations so as to minimize their duration at any given location, and to

minimize disruption to the adjoining users. b. Notify Owner and Architect in advance of performing work creating unusual noise and

schedule such work at times mutually agreeable. c. Coordinate timing of noisy operations with Owner.

6. Do not play radios, tape recorders, televisions, and other similar items at construction site. E. Sewer Sediment Control:

1. Maintain sewers and temporary connecting sewers in a reasonably clean, unclogged condition during construction period.



F. Water Control: 1. Control fill, grading, and ditching to direct surface drainage to proper runoff away for excavations,

pits, tunnels, and other construction areas. 2. Dispose of drainage water in manner to prevent flooding, erosion, or other damage to any portion of

the site or adjoining areas. 3. Obtain and pay for any discharge permits required.

G. Erosion Control:

1. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas, prevent erosion and sedimentation.

2. Minimize surface area of bare soil exposed at one time. 3. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply

corrective measures. 4. Selectively place constructed fills and waste areas to eliminate surface silts or clays that will erode. 5. Provide temporary measures including berms, dikes, and drains, and other devices to prevent water

flow. 6. Discharge construction runoff into small drainages at frequent intervals to avoid build-up of large

potentially erosive flows. 7. Prevent runoff from flowing over unprotected slopes. 8. Keep disturbed areas to the minimum necessary for construction. 9. Keep runoff away from disturbed areas during construction. 10. Direct flows over vegetated areas prior to discharge into public storm drainage systems. 11. Trap sediment before it leaves the site, using such techniques as check dams, sediment ponds, or

siltation fences. 12. Remove and dispose of all project construction-generated siltation that occurs in offsite retention

ponds. 13. Stabilize disturbed areas as quickly as possible.

H. Pollution Control:

1. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

2. Comply with pollution and environmental control requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the Work

and entering facility.

J. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises.

3.10 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE

A. Project Identification Sign: . 1. Mount and maintain Project Identification sign throughout duration of work on the project. 2. Furnish, mount, and maintain one Project Identification sign, sized 4 by 8 feet unless otherwise

noted. 3. Repair damage to Project Identification sign caused by vandalism and wear. 4. Project Identification Sign Content:

a. Project number, title, logo, and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents. b. Name and titles of authorities. c. Name of Architect and his consultants. d. Name of Contractor and major subcontractors.

5. Graphic Design, Colors, and Style of Lettering: Will be provided by Architect. 6. Construction: Construct of minimum 3/4 inch thick B-face or better exterior grade high density

overlay plywood. Support and brace with 4 by 4 inch posts and 2 by 4 inch framing of Douglas Fir. Paint sign with three coat exterior enamel paint system. Employ professional sign painter to execute layout and lettering.



7. Ensure Project Identification signs are complete and in place within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed.

B. Project Information Signs:

1. Painted information signs of same colors and lettering as Project Identification sign, or standard products.

2. Size lettering for legibility at 100 feet distance. 3. Provide sign at each field office, storage shed, and directional signs to direct traffic into and within

site. 4. Provide signs identifying potential hazards, i.e. trenches, excavation, similar items to warn public in

compliance with safety practices required for urban construction projects. 5. Provide signs required ensuring parking, on loading, and off loading, in stipulated areas; ingress

and egress along stipulated routes; and reasonable conduct on the part of persons associated with the construction process.

6. Relocate signs, as Work progress requires. 7. No other signs are allowed, without Owner’s permission, except those required by law.

3.11 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Upon completion of any portion of the Work, promptly remove temporary facilities generated by that portion

of the Work, including surplus materials, equipment, and machinery if so directed by Architect. B. Remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. C. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial

Completion. D. Clean and repair damage caused by installation, use, and removal of temporary work. E. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used

during construction to specified condition. F. Prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new lamps. G. Dispose of all debris resulting from removal and reconditioning operations in accordance with requirements of

Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal. END OF SECTION 01 50 00



Temporary Tree and Plant Protection

01 56 39 - 1

SECTION 01 56 39 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Protection and welfare of all existing trees within the Contract Limits which are

noted to remain, including construction of temporary barricades and trimming and repair of such trees as

necessary.


A. International Society of Arboriculture:

1. ISA Guide - Guide For Establishing Values of Trees and Other Plants.


A. General Responsibility: Contractor shall be directly responsible for protection and welfare of all existing trees

within the Contract Limits that are noted to remain. This responsibility shall continue throughout the full

construction period until the entire Project is completed and accepted by Owner.

B. Qualifications of Workmen: Provide at least one person approved by Architect who shall be present at all times

during tree protection and trimming operations, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of work

involved, and who shall direct all protection and trimming work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Temporary Tree Barricades: Unless otherwise specifically approved by Architect use only new and solid

lumber of Utility grade or better to construct temporary barricades around trees noted to remain.

B. Pruning Paint: Use only a pruning paint specially formulated for horticultural application to cut or damaged

plant tissue and approved by Architect for use on this Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION, PLANNING AND COORDINATION

A. Prior to performing any work of this Contract, Contractor shall carefully inspect the trees to be protected and,

in cooperation with Architect, shall formulate an effective plan for tree protection throughout the construction

period.

B. Cooperate with Architect to assure coordination of all tree protection and trimming work with similar work

performed by Owner.

3.2 TRIMMING AND PRUNING OF EXISTING TREES

A. In company with Architect, ascertain the limbs that need to be trimmed to provide adequate clearance for

passage of vehicles or clearance as required for new structure. Clearly, mark limb to designate the approved

point of cutting.




01 56 39 - 2

B. Where trimming or significant branch removal is necessary, the work will be performed by professional tree

surgeons.

C. Where large branches must be removed, additional pruning shall be performed to restore the overall character

of the tree as directed by Architect.

D. Do not use climbing spikes without approval by Architect.

E. Cut evenly, using proper tools and skilled workers to achieve neat severance with the least possible damage to

the tree.

F. Promptly coat the cut area with the approved pruning paint in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

3.3 EXCAVATION AROUND TREES

A. Perform excavation within drip lines of trees only where absolutely necessary. Coordinate this work with

Architect

B. Where trenching for utilities is required within drip lines, perform tunneling under and around roots by hand

digging. Do not cut main lateral roots and tap roots. Smaller roots (2 inches in diameter and less) that interfere

with installation of new work may be cut.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, employ hand excavation to

minimize damage to root systems. Relocate roots in backfill areas wherever possible. If large main lateral

roots are encountered, expose beyond excavation limits as required to bend and relocate without breaking.

D. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before permanent backfill is placed. Provide temporary earth cover, or

pack roots with wet peat moss or 4 layers of wet untreated burlap and temporarily supported and protected

from damage until permanently relocated and covered with backfill.

E. Thin branching structures in accordance with National Arborists Association “Pruning Standards and Practices”

to balance loss to root system caused by damage or cutting of root system. Do not thin more than 30 percent of

existing branching structure.

3.4 PROTECTION OF TREES

A. Contractor acknowledges that it is familiar with Owner’s policies for the protection of trees and agrees to take

reasonable precautions to protect trees not subject to trimming or removal from damage which might be caused

during work. Refer to the Municipal Code of the City of Carmel-by-the-Sea Chapter 12.28.

B. Water and fertilize trees and other vegetation, which are to remain within the Contract Limits as required to

maintain their health during the course of construction operations.

C. Do not permit following conditions:

1. Using trees as support posts, power poles, sign posts, or anchorage for ropes, guy wires, and power

lines or other similar functions.

2. Poisoning items by disposing of paint, petroleum products, dirty water, soil sterilants, or other

deleterious materials on or around roots.

3. Excessive water or heat from equipment, utility line construction, or burning of trash under or near

shrubs or trees.

4. Compaction of root area by moving trucks, grading machines, storage of equipment, gravel, earth fill,

supplies, etc.

5. Damage to trunk or limbs caused by maneuvering vehicles or stacking material and equipment too

close to the item.




01 56 39 - 3

6. Damage to root system from flooding, excessive wetting and drying resulting from de-watering and

other operations.

3.5 REPAIR AND COMPENSATION

A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations in a manner acceptable to Architect. Repair of tree

damage shall be done by a qualified tree surgeon. Repair of damaged trees shall be done without any

additional cost to Owner.

B. Compensation for Planting Loss: Any tree or shrub to remain, which is damaged or destroyed due to

Contractor’s negligence or failure to provide adequate protection shall be compensated for in accordance with

following schedule of values, using “tree caliper” method (greatest trunk diameter measured 30 inches above

ground):

1. For trees or shrubs with diameters up to and including 6 inches, the actual cost of replacement with

item similar in species, size, and shape, including:

a. Actual cost of item boxed out of ground.

b. Transportation or delivery of boxed item to site.

c. Planting and staking.

d. Maintenance in watering, fertilizing, pruning, pest control, and other care to bring

replacement to same general condition of original item.

2. For trunks over 6 inches in diameter, refer to ISA Guide for establishing value for compensation for

plant loss.




Product Requirements

01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: The requirements for product bans, basic products, product delivery, and product

storage and handling, installation, and protection.

1.2 PRODUCT BANS

A. Asbestos:

1. Owner forbids any manufactured building materials, products, components of building materials,

or building systems containing asbestos in any amount to be incorporated into the Work and

Owner’s facilities or property. If asbestos-containing materials are required to match existing

conditions/materials and cannot be substituted with non-asbestos-containing materials, then

Contractor shall submit documentation to Owner and request and obtain written permission prior

to installing the asbestos-containing materials, including any manufacturer specifications,

MSDS(s), and/or any other relevant and Owner requested information, and indicating the material

and asbestos content and locations where the material is to be placed and/or installed within the

Work or Owner building.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with removal, disposal, and replacement of

materials installed by Contractor or Subcontractors and found to be in violation of this requirement.

Contractor shall indemnify Owner for all costs related to regulatory agency citations or litigation and

court ordered settlements arising from asbestos exposure lawsuits where the source of asbestos is

directly attributed to products installed by Contractor or Subcontractors.

B. Lead-Containing Paints and Surface Coatings: All paints, finishes, and protective coatings, including coatings

designed for industrial use or highway applications, applied to Owner’s facilities or property shall be lead-free.

Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with removal, disposal, and replacement of materials

installed by Contractor or Subcontractors and found to be in violation of this requirement.

C. Urea-Formaldehyde Products: All construction products including, but not limited to, thermal insulation,

particle board, press board, and plywood shall be free of urea-formaldehyde. Contractor shall be responsible

for all costs associated with removal, disposal, and replacement of materials installed by Contractor and found

to be in violation of this requirement.

1.3 BASIC PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS

A. Incorporate into the Work products, material and equipment that are:

1. New, unless otherwise specified,

2. In compliance with specified requirements,

3. In a condition acceptable to Architect,

4. Undamaged and unused at time of installation

5. Complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety provisions and other devices and details needed for a

complete installation,

6. Suitable for the intended use, and

7. Match existing adjacent material as required.

B. Where available, provide standard products of types which have been produced and used previously and

successfully on other projects and in similar applications.




01 60 00 - 2

C. Do not use any product, materials or equipment for purposes other than that for which designated or specified.

Do not use products, materials or equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted

by Contract Documents.

D. Definitions:

1. “Products” are purchased items for incorporation into the work.

2. “Materials” are products that must be substantially worked, mixed, fabricated, processed, or applied.

3. “Equipment” is defined as products with operational parts.

4. Definitions in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms such as

“specialties”, “systems”, “structure”, “finishes”, “accessories”, “furnishings”, “special construction”,

and similar terms, which are self-explanatory or have recognized meanings in the construction

industry.

5. Products, materials and equipment do not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,

fabrication, conveying and erection of Work.

E. To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, provide products, materials, or equipment of a generic

kind from a single source. For example, provide toilet accessories from a single manufacturer unless otherwise

specified.

F. Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer, for similar components.

G. Where more than one choice is available, select an option that is compatible with other products and materials

already selected.

H. Labels:

1. Except as otherwise indicated, do not allow conspicuous labels advertising any manufacturer or trade

name on products in occupied spaces or on exterior of building.

2. Locate required labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for observation after

installation, on an accessible surface that, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous.

3. Provide permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment.

Indicate manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, speed, ratings, and

similar essential operating data. Locate nameplates on an easily accessed surface that, in occupied

areas, is not conspicuous.

4. Products, materials and equipment, for which testing laboratories standards have been established

and their label service is available, shall bear the appropriate Label.

5. Architect reserves the right to review and request the removal or redesign of the manufacturers’ trade

marks and names on items of materials and equipment which will be exposed to view in the complete

Work. Such removal or redesign shall be at no increase in Contract Sum.

I. Fire Rated Work: Materials and equipment, for which Underwriters’ Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services,

National Fire Protection Association, or other Standards have been established and their label service is

available, shall bear appropriate label.

J. Shop fabricate and pre-assemble interrelated parts where possible.

K. Provide standard products of types that have been produced and used previously and successfully on other

projects and in similar applications.

L. Where additional amounts of a product, by nature of its application, are likely to be needed by Owner at a later

date for maintenance and repair or replacement work, furnish standard, domestically produced product which is

likely to be available to Owner at such later date.

M. When specified in individual Sections, provide and deliver extra stock of products, materials, or equipment, to

locations designated by Architect.




01 60 00 - 3

N. Remove rejected items immediately from the Work and replace with items of quality specified. Failure to

remove rejected materials and equipment shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for quality and

character of items used nor from any other obligation imposed upon him by Contract.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Section 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions for additional requirements.

B. Arrange delivery schedules:

1. To minimize length of on-site storage prior to installation, particularly for products and materials

recognized to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other

sources of loss.

2. In accordance with construction progress schedules.

3. To allow for inspection prior to installation.

4. To avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site.

C. Transport products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Provide equipment and personnel to transport and handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfiguration,

or damage.

E. Deliver manufactured products in the manufacturer’s original unbroken containers or packaging, with

identifying labels intact and legible. Labels to show manufacturer’s name, brand, and grade seal or model

number.

F. Require supplier to package products in boxes or crates for protection during shipment, handling, and storage.

Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements and moisture.

G. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion, and other damage.

H. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment and contents to permit

easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly.

I. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure that:

1. Products comply with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals.

2. Quantities are correct.

3. Accessories and installation hardware are correct.

4. Containers and packages are intact and labels legible.

5. Products are properly protected and undamaged.

J. Provide equipment and personnel to immediately transfer delivered products to designated holding area at time

of delivery.

K. Promptly remove damaged or defective products from the site, and replace at no increase in Contract Sum.

1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

A. Store and handle products, materials, and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Store products, materials and equipment with seals and labels intact and legible.

C. Arrange storage to facilitate easy access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection.

D. Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Confine stockpiling of materials to

Project Area.




01 60 00 - 4

E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

F. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging,

and surrounding surfaces.

G. Handle product by methods to avoid bending or overstressing. Lift large and heavy components only at

designated lift points.

H. Store sensitive products and materials in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment

favorable to product.

I. Enclosed Storage:

1. Store product, materials, and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, with seals

and labels intact and legible.

2. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.

3. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges specified by the manufacturers.

4. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive products as required by manufacturer’s

instructions.

5. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items.

J. Exterior Storage:

1. Store fabricated products above the ground on sloped blocking or skids to prevent soiling and

staining.

2. Cover products subject to discoloration and deterioration from exposure to the elements with

impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

3. Store loose granular material in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign

matter.

4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water.

5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids.

K. No storage of equipment, materials, and toolboxes outside the construction barrier will be permitted.

L. Store paints or any other combustible materials in the properly rated storage lockers.

M. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

N. Maintenance of Storage: Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis and verify that:

1. Stored facilities comply with manufacturer’s product storage requirements.

2. Manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually.

3. Products and materials are undamaged.

4. Products and materials are maintained in acceptable condition.

5. Surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected; that any weathering of

finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents.

6. Products and materials are free from damage or deterioration.

O. Promptly remove damaged or defective products from the site, and replace at no increase in Contract Sum.





01 60 00 - 5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in applications

indicated. Accurately locate and secure each product.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Prevent damage to products, materials, equipment, finishes, and other installed work.

B. Use whatever protective materials or methods are necessary to prevent damage to products, materials,

equipment finishes, and other installed work from traffic, construction operations, and weather. Remove

protection when no longer required.

C. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions in interior spaces for the Work in accordance with

manufacturers' instructions for the products, materials, equipment finishes, and other installed work being

protected.

D. Protect the various products, materials, equipment, finishes, and other installed work provided by the

several trades from other operations or work in an appropriate manner to ensure they are in satisfactory

condition at the Date of Substantial Completion. Final responsibility for protection rests with Contractor.




Product Substitution Procedures

01 62 00 - 1

SECTION 01 62 00 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: Procedures for making substitutions, procedures for their proposal, and criteria for

their acceptance or rejection.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. The term “product” includes materials, systems, and equipment. Products shall be new, undamaged, of the

types specified, and furnished in ample quantities to facilitate proper execution of the work.

B. An “equal” product is any material, product, thing, or service that is in all respects equal to the item specified,

including, but not limited to, size, quality, guarantees, and materials. The final determination of whether or not

a proposed product is “equal” to the specified product rests with Architect.

C. A “substitution” is any material, product, thing, or service, which may or may not be equal, as determined by

Architect, in all respects to the specified item but which is proposed by Contractor to be used in lieu of the

specified item.


A. Architect’s Compensation:

1. Except as limited by provisions of Owner-Architect or Owner-Contractor Agreements, Contractor

shall reimburse Owner for compensation paid to Architect for evaluation of substitution proposals

made during construction, whether or not substitution is accepted by Owner.

2. Refer to Request for Substitution form at the end of this Section.

B. Delays and Costs:

1. Substitution proposals made during construction shall be in accordance with procedures outlined in

this Section, and be made in sufficient time to allow for adequate time for Architect’s review and

evaluation.

2. Delays and added costs associated with inadequate supportive data, necessary extended

evaluations, or redesign work caused by substitutions shall be borne by Contractor.

3. Cost changes resulting from proposed substitutions shall be clearly stated with the initial

substitution proposal.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S OPTIONS

A. For items specified by only reference standards of trade, industry, or governmental organization, select any

item meeting standards, by any manufacturer. Any item not in compliance with referenced standards will be

considered a substitution.

B. For items specified by naming several products by manufacturer’s trade name or model designation, select any

product and manufacturer named. Any item, which bears different trade name or model designation, will be

considered a substitution. Where any one product is specified, but other manufacturers are listed as acceptable,

their products will be considered a substitution.

C. For items specified by naming one or more products, but indicating the option of selecting equivalent products

by stating “or equal” after specified product, submit request as required for substitution for any product not

specifically named.




01 62 00 - 2

1. An equal will qualify as such where item proposed conforms to descriptive, performance or

proprietary requirements of the specifications and locational, dimensional and visual requirements

shown on the drawings.

2. An equal will qualify as such where item proposed conforms with performance criteria specified,

meets dimensional and visual requirements shown on drawings and, in Architect’s opinion, does not

unreasonably alter other work of this contract, separate contract work, or occasion extra expense or

additional contract time.

3. In determining approved equals or approved alternates, Architect’s judgment will be final.

D. An item that does not conform to descriptive, performance, visual, dimensional or proprietary requirements

specified or shown will be considered a substitution.

E. Where specification is by combination of descriptive material, reference to standards, performance criteria or

manufacturer’s trade names, and there are discrepancies or conflicts between requirements specified, Architect

reserves the right to consider item a substitution which fails to satisfy at least one of the conflicting

requirements of the specification.

F. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, without the qualifying phrase “or equal”

or “or approved equal” there is no option, and no substitution will be allowed. Such is the case with products,

materials, equipment or systems which are specified for the purpose of matching a specific function or

economy of maintenance of other products, materials, equipment or systems already in use in existing portions

of Owner’s installations. Where matching with an existing item is required, the final decision whether a

product proposed matches the item satisfactorily is Architect’s judgment.

G. Except as otherwise indicated, where Specifications include the statement “...as selected from manufacturer’s

standard colors, patterns, textures...” or words of similar effect, the selection of manufacturer and basic product

(complying with Specifications) is the Contractor’s option, and the selection of color, pattern, and texture shall

be Architect’s selection.

1.5 LIST OF PRODUCTS

A. Not later than 15 days after the receipt of the Notice to Proceed, provide a list to Architect showing the names

of manufacturers proposed to be used for each of the products identified in the Specifications, including

substitutions and where applicable, the name of the installer. Tabulate products by Specification section

number and title, article number, and paragraph letter.

B. Architect will reply, in writing, to Contractor stating whether Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable

objection to any such proposal. If adequate data on any proposed manufacturer or installer is not available,

Architect may state that action will be deferred until Contractor provides further data.

C. Up to and until 35 days after the date of the Notice to Proceed, Architect will consider Contractor’s formal

requests for substitutions in place of the specified items under the conditions set forth in this Section, assuming

the item was listed in paragraph A above. No requests will be considered after 35 days after the Notice to

Proceed except as specified in this Section.

D. The 35 day submittal period does not excuse Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time.

1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBSTITUTION

A. Substitutions which are equal in quality, utility, and appearance to those specified may be accepted, subject to

following provisions:

1. Substitutions are accepted by Architect in writing.

2. Proposed substitutions where included on list of products described above.

3. Submission by Contractor of supporting data as required by this section.




01 62 00 - 3

4. Proposed substitutions must meet all manufacturing and testing criteria, performance and durability

tests while maintaining the same aesthetic character with regard to color, reflectivity, pattern, texture

and finish.

5. Proposed substitutions comply with specific performances indicated and specified, and which are

recommended by the manufacturer (in published product literature or by individual certification) for

application indicated.

6. Proposed substitution have been produced in accordance with prescriptive requirements, using

specified ingredients and components, and complying with specified requirements for fabricating,

finishing, testing, and similar operations in manufacturing process.

7. Contractor is responsible for the effect of a substitution on related work in the Project.

8. Contractor is responsible for paying additional costs generated by a substitution, including the costs of

Architect’s additional services.

B. By making a request for substitution, Contractor:

1. Represents that it has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and has determined that

it is equal or superior in all respects to the specified product.

2. Represents that it will provide the same warranty for the substitution that he would have for the

specified product.

3. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under the contract.

4. Waives all claims for additional costs or schedule impact related to the substitution that subsequently

becomes apparent.

5. Will coordinate the installation of the substitute, making sure changes as may be required for the work

to be complete in all respects.

C. Substitutions will not be considered if;

1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without formal request

submitted in accordance with this Section;

2. They are requested directly by subcontractor or supplier;

3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of the Contract Documents;

4. Proposed product is inferior to the specified product as judged by Architect; and

5. Request does not include sufficient data for Architect to make a reasonable judgment regarding the

acceptability of the proposed substitution.

D. Do not purchase or install proposed substitution without written acceptance from Architect. By acceptance of

proposed substitution Contractor is not relieved from responsibility for the proper execution of the Work and

any other requirements specified in Contract Documents.

E. The burden of proving that the proposed substitution is “equal” to the specified product is upon Contractor and

such proof shall include sufficient factual and comparative data and information necessary to establish that the

requested substitution is equal in quality, utility, structural strength, mechanical and technical performance,

finish, arrangement of plan, repair and maintenance, compatibility with other existing or specified items, and

any other relevant data.

F. Source Limitation: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, provide products, materials, or

equipment of a generic kind from a single source. For example, provide toilet accessories from a single

manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

G. Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for Contractor’s selection of

a product or material, select an option, which is compatible with other products and materials already

selected. Total compatibility among options is not assured by limitations within contract documents, but

must be provided by the Contractor. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product/material

selections. Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer, for similar components.

H. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used

previously and successfully on other projects and in similar applications.




01 62 00 - 4

I. If Architect, in reviewing the list of materials and equipment, requires revisions or corrections to be made to

previously accepted shop drawings and supplemental data to be resubmitted, Contractor shall promptly do so.

If any proposed material is judged by Architect to be unacceptable, the specified item shall be provided; further

submissions will not be allowed, unless directed by Architect.

J. Physical samples may be required. If tests for the determination of quality and utility are required by Architect,

they shall be made by a testing laboratory, with acceptance of the test procedure first given by Architect, and at

the expense of Contractor.

K. In reviewing the data submitted in support of substitutes, Architect will use for purposes of comparison all the

characteristics of the specified item as they appear in the manufacturer’s published data even though all the

characteristics of the specified item may not have been particularly mentioned in the specification. If more

than two submissions of data are required the cost of reviewing these additional submissions shall be charged

directly against Contractor and Owner will withhold the funds necessary to cover these costs.

L. Architect will be the judge of the acceptability of proposed substitutions, and his determination will be final.

M. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. If a substitution is rejected, provide the

product originally specified.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Submit separate request for each substitution. Document each request with complete data substantiating

compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Identify product by Specifications section name and number, article numbers and paragraph letters. Provide

manufacturer’s name and address, trade name of product, and model or catalog number. List subcontractors,

fabricators, and suppliers as appropriate.

C. Requests for substitutions will only be considered if Contractor submits the following supporting data:

1. Complete technical data including drawings, performance specifications, samples, and test reports of

the article proposed for substitution.

2. List similar projects using product, dates of installation, and names of Architect and Owner.

3. Submit statement that the proposed substitution is in full compliance with the requirements of

Contract Documents and Applicable Code Requirements.

4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing variations, and reference

to Specifications section name and number, article numbers and paragraph letters.

5. Quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and the specified product.

6. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials.

7. List of Subcontractors, if any, that may be affected by the substitution.

8. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other work or products.

9. Any additional information required by Architect.

D. If the proposed substitution requires that portions of the Work be redesigned or removed in order to

accommodate the substituted item, submit design and engineering calculations prepared by a properly licensed

design professional.

E. Where agencies such as Division of Facilities Development of the Office of Statewide Health Planning and

Development, State Fire Marshal, International Conference of Building Officials, or local bureau of Building

Inspection, exercise jurisdiction over use of specific material or method, Contractor shall submit certification of

their approval of proposed substitution.




01 62 00 - 5

1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Submit three copies of request for substitution.

B. Architect will review Contractor’s requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.

C. For accepted products, submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Section 01330 –

Submittal Procedures.

1.9 ARCHITECT’S REVIEW

A. Architect, acting as Owner’s designated agent for design of this project, shall be the sole judge of whether

Contractor’s proposed substitution is equal and shall make his judgment in accordance with following criteria:

1. Whether substitution proposed conforms with description or performance specified;

2. Whether substitution proposed is equal in quality;

3. Whether substitution proposed is comparable in appearance and artistic effect where these are

considerations;

4. Whether substitution proposed affords comparable operation, maintenance, and performance;

5. Whether substitution proposed will provide equal longevity and service under conditions of climate

and usage;

6. Whether substitution proposed will fit into space allocated or operate from mechanical or electrical

services provided without necessitating changes in details and construction of related work;

7. Whether substitution is otherwise in Owner’s interest, offering advantages in cost and time.

B. Architect may reject any substitutions not proposed in the manner and within the time prescribed in this

section.

1.10 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER TIME SPECIFIED

A. No substitutions of materials, products, or equipment will be considered after the time described in the above

paragraphs unless the specified material cannot be delivered or incorporated into the work in the time allowed

due to conditions beyond the control of Contractor.

B. Reimburse Owner’s cost for additional services required by Architect to review and process those substitutions

submitted after the time specified.

C. Written requests for substitutions shall include reasons for the request, proof that delivery is impossible,

complete description and data of the proposed substitute necessary for a complete evaluation of costs, delivery

time, and other necessary information.

D. Costs of delays, which could have been avoided by the timely submission of requests for substitutions, shall be

borne by Contractor.

1.11 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCEPTED SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Acceptance of substitutions shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with requirements of

Contract Documents.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for changes in other parts of the work occasioned by his substitutions and shall

bear their expense.





01 62 00 - 6





Examination and Preparation

01 71 00 - 1

SECTION 01 71 00 - EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Examination.

2. Preparation/

3. Existing utility lines.

4. Protection of adjacent construction.

5. Buried conditions.

1.2 EXAMINATION

A. Data in these Specifications and on Drawings are as accurate as possible, but are not guaranteed.

B. Specifications and Drawings show existing structures, waste lines, hot and cold water lines, gas, electrical,

mechanical, chilled water, and other utilities which are known to Owner and are as accurate as possible but

not guaranteed. Verify locations, levels, dimensions and features that may affect the Work. Existing

installations shall be kept in service where possible. No allowance will be made in Contractor’s behalf for

extra expense resulting from failure or neglect in determining conditions under which Work is to be

performed, or in Contractor’s interpretation of information provided.

C. Before starting work:

1. Verify locations, levels, dimensions, and features that may affect the Work.

2. Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting each installation.

3. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work.

4. Examine and verify with installer areas, substrates, or construction to receive work and conditions,

described in individual specification sections, under which work is to be performed.

5. Examine adjoining work on which installment is in any way dependent for perfect workmanship and

fit.

6. Examine each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation and reject damaged

and defective items.

7. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.

8. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied

or attached.

D. Report unsatisfactory conditions that are detrimental to proper and timely installation of work in writing to

Architect.

E. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and accepted by installer. Start

of work will signify compliance with the above requirements and acceptance of previously placed

construction or substrates as being in satisfactory condition to achieve proper installations and first quality

workmanship as intended under these specifications.

F. No allowance will be made in Contractor’s behalf for any extra expense resulting from failure or neglect in

determining the conditions under which Work is to be performed, or in Contractor’s interpretation of the

information provided.

G. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.




01 71 00 - 2

1.3 PREPARATION

A. Prior to starting a particular type or kind of work:

1. Examine for relevant information, all Contract Documents and subsequent data issued;

2. Verify measurements in field, as required, for work fabricated to fit job conditions;

3. Check accepted submittals and verify dimensions at job site; and

4. Consult manufacturers for instructions applicable to conditions under which Work is to be

installed.

B. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

D. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new

material or substance in contact or bond

1.4 EXISTING UTILITY LINES

A. Be responsible for disposition necessary for existing above-grade utilities and for utilities either known or

visible by site inspection. Disposition shall include rerouting lines to be continued in service.

B. Undocumented Utilities: If any undocumented utilities are encountered, request directions from Architect

before proceeding with Work.

1.5 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION

A. Drawings show, as applicable, existing above and below grade structures, drainage lines, storm drains, sewers,

water, gas, electrical, hot water, and other utilities that are known to Owner.

B. Adequately and continuously, protect adjacent construction from damage by the Work of this Contract. Repair

and replace in an approved manner as directed by Architect at no cost to Owner any damage to existing and

installed construction.

C. Take precautions at all times to protect property affected in any way by the Work; guard against or eliminate

hazardous conditions.

D. Provide suitable temporary and removable protective materials and methods are necessary to avoid damage or

deterioration to existing adjacent construction due to traffic, construction operations, , from action of the

elements, from carelessness of Contractor's employees or subcontractors and their employees, from vandalism,

and from any other cause until completion and Owner's acceptance of the Work. Control activity in immediate

work area to prevent damage.

E. Damage: If any existing structure or utility is damaged, take appropriate action to ensure safety of persons and

property. Report such incidents to Architect immediately.

F. If settlement of adjacent structures occurs due to vibration from Contractor’s equipment, Contractor must cease

operations at Owner’s request and use equipment that does not cause the settlement.

G. Remove protective materials when no longer needed.

1.6 BURIED CONDITIONS

A. At no change in Contract Sum, remove known existing construction of any nature below-grade wherever it

occurs within immediate area of new construction, new paving, and new planted areas.




01 71 00 - 3

B. If previously undocumented underground water, gas, electric, or other utility lines, drain lines, sewers, tunnels,

vaults, wells, or other construction are encountered by excavation, dispose of such items according to following

conditions:

1. Upon encountering any utility line, drain line, sewer, or utility tunnel, verify active or inactive status

of item.

a. If inactive, remove that portion within excavated area.

2. If any undocumented structures are encountered, request directions from Architect before proceeding

with Work.






Field Engineering

01 71 23 - 1

SECTION 01 71 23 - FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: Basic requirements for construction layout.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Civil engineer's or land surveyor's qualifications including at least name, address, telephone, and license

number.

B. Certification signed by the civil engineer or land surveyor that the elevations and locations of the Work are in

conformance with Contract Documents.


A. Contractor is solely responsible for the complete, timely and accurate layout of the work including, but not

necessarily limited to, horizontal and vertical control and dimensional coordination as necessary to construct

the Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

B. Contractor agrees to cooperate with Architect, if necessary, to accommodate any discovered variations or

deviations from Contract Documents so that the progress of the Work is not adversely affected.

C. Ensure dimensional coordination of Work laid out with existing work and work to be subsequently constructed.

D. Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor: Registered or licensed in the state in which project is located and acceptable

to Architect.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Preparation: Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. Promptly notify Architect of any

discrepancies discovered.

B. Survey Reference Points:

1. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the Project are indicated.

2. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve permanent reference points

during construction. Make no changes or relocations without prior notice to Architect.

3. Promptly report to Architect when a control or reference point is lost or destroyed or requires

relocation because of necessary changes in grades, locations or other reasons. Replace lost or

destroyed control or reference points based an original survey control.

C. Project Layout:

1. Provide all construction survey work required for accurate location of the Work. Provide services of a

civil engineer or land surveyor to do required construction survey work.

2. Establish a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on site, referenced to established control points.

3. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.



Field Engineering

01 71 23 - 2

4. Layout necessary lines for various parts of the Work as shown or dimensioned on Drawings, or as

directed by Architect from established base lines and benchmarks.

5. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate

means:

a. Identify, stake, and flag existing known above and below grade utilities.

b. Site improvements, including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; and

utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.

c. Grid or axis for structures.

d. Building foundation, column locations, and ground floor elevations.

e. Interior partitioning including spaces, chases, and openings allotted to pipes, ducts, conduits,

and similar items.

f. Controlling lines and levels required by mechanical and electrical work.

6. Check structural steel framework for plumbness and establish on steel frame the required reference

points, bench marks and basic grid lines from which work of other sections is to be laid out.

Coordinate tolerances of various materials.

7. Verify layouts as Work proceeds to ensure compliance with required lines, levels, and tolerances.

Preserve permanent reference points throughout construction operations.

8. After laying out the Work, inform workers and subcontractors accordingly.

9. Lay out the mechanical and electrical work in conformity with Drawings, coordination drawings and

other shop drawings, product data and similar requirements, so that the entire mechanical plant will

perform as an integrated system properly interfaced with electrical work and other work.

10. Replace control points, which have been lost or destroyed, at no increase in the Contract Sum. Base

replacements on original survey control.

D. Contractor shall verify the inverts or flow lines of all existing utility structures adjacent to the site or to be

connected to, including but not limited to stubs, drainage channels, laterals, catch basins, junction boxes,

manholes and gutters.

E. Records:

1. Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

2. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, including underground site utilities,

prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction.

F. Verification of Layout: Architect at its discretion, may arrange to have Contractor's grades, measurements, or

levels checked and verified by an independent licensed surveyor. If layout is found to be outside of allowable

tolerances, pay cost of checking or verification.




Execution

01 73 00 - 1

SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: The following subjects are covered in this section.

1. Erection/Installation/Application of the Work.

2. Conversation and Salvage.

3. Damage and Restoration.

4. Structural Integrity.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION OF THE WORK

A. Perform work with craftsmen well experienced and competent in their particular trade.

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with the

manufacturer’s applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to the extent that these

instructions and recommendations are more explicit or more stringent than requirements are indicated in the

Contract Documents.

C. Install work during weather conditions and project conditions, which will ensure best possible results.

D. Be responsible for seeing that anchorage, blocking, joining and other detailing is provided as required.

E. Provide attachments, connections, fastenings, and insert device and methods for securing work. Secure work

true to line, level, and within recognized industry tolerances. Drawings show only special conditions to assist

Contractor; they do not illustrate every such detail.

F. Install work allowing for expansion, contraction, shrinkage, and building movement as necessary to prevent

cracks, buckling, and warping of completed work.

G. Install finished work with smooth, clean, uniform appearance without waves, distortions, holes, marks, cracks,

stains, or discoloration. Provide exposed work with uniform, close fitting, neat, and well scribed joints.

Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain best visual effect. Refer questionable visual effect choices to

Architect for final decision.

H. Install finish work with no exposed unsightly anchors or fastenings and no hazardous, unsafe, or unfinished

protrusions, offset, burrs, raw edges, or sharp corners.

I. No work defective in construction or quality or deficient in any requirement of Drawings and Specifications

will be acceptable in consequence of Owner’s or Architect’s failure to discover or to point out defects or

deficiencies during construction; nor will the presence of Inspectors on the work relieve Contractor from

responsibility for securing the quality and progress of work as required by the Contract. Defective work

revealed within the time required by guarantees shall be replaced by work conforming to the intent of the

Contract. No payment, whether partial or final, shall be construed as an acceptance of defective work or

improper materials.



Execution

01 73 00 - 2

J. Waive “common practice” and “common usage” as construction criteria whenever Contract Documents or

codes, ordinances, or similar items require greater quantity or better quality than common practice or common

usage would require.

K. If at any time before commencement of work, or during progress thereof, Contractor’s methods, equipment, or

appliances are inefficient or inappropriate for securing the quality of work or rate of progress intended by the

Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to improve their quality or increase their efficiency. This

will not relieve Contractor or his sureties from their obligations to secure the quality of work and rate of

progress specified in the Contract.

L. Provide holes, slots, cutouts, blocking, screeds, nailers, chases and similar preparation as the work progresses,

as required to receive or pass subsequent work without damage to previously completed work.

M. Make exterior work tight against direct or indirect entry of water into concealed or interior spaces of the

building. Seal joints or penetrations below grade or behind exterior trim and other conditions where water

might enter the structure, in same manner as for exposed exterior work.

N. Structural Connections and Fasteners;

1. Include materials, types, and adequate sizes for complete fabrication and installation of the Work.

2. Place in concealed or obscure locations where possible.

3. Include suitable welding or brazing where required.

O. Ferrous Metal Work:

1. Galvanize work permanently exposed to exterior or below grade; related accessory members and

fastening non-ferrous, galvanize or make rustproof by approved methods.

2. Meet requirements of Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications and Section 09 91 00 - Painting for

galvanizing, prime painting, and related touch-up and repair.

P. Isolation: Provide between ferrous and non-ferrous or dissimilar metal components to protect the work against

electrolysis, as follows:

1. For architectural work, provide cork fillers, asphaltic coatings, neoprene gaskets, or similar separation

as necessary; and use stainless steel fastenings only where interconnecting dissimilar parts.

2. For mechanical and electrical work, provide dielectric unions or similar separation. In particular,

provide isolation as necessary between exterior underground systems and interior above-grade

systems where they meet dissimilar metals.

Q. Remove and replace all work that does not comply with Contract Documents. Repair or replace any Work or

property damaged by these operations at no increase in Contract sum.

3.2 CONSERVATION AND SALVAGE

A. Conduct construction operations with maximum practical consideration for:

1. Conservation of energy, water, and materials.

2. Salvaging materials and equipment involved in performance of the Work but not incorporated in it.

3.3 DAMAGE AND RESTORATION

A. Restore or replace as specified or directed by Architect damage to adjacent existing facilities including any

landscaping, paving, roads and sidewalks damaged as a result of the performance of this work at no

additional cost to Owner.

B. Restorations to approval by Architect. Restorations to be made as necessary at no added expense to Owner

unless otherwise particularly provided for.



Execution

01 73 00 - 3

C. Restoration shall be equal to the Structural qualities or performance capacities of the restoration to be equal

of the original work.

D. Appearances of finishes to match, as nearly as possible, like existing adjacent work.

E. Remove and replace work not properly restored or where not capable of being restored as intended under

these Specifications as directed by at Architect at no added expense to Owner.

F. Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs will not be considered to justify an

extension in the Contract Time of Completion.

3.4 STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY

A. Be responsible for and particularly supervise each operation and work that may affect structural integrity of

various building elements, both permanent and temporary.

B. Include structural connections and fastenings as shown or required for complete fabrication and installation

of the Work.




Cutting and Patching

01 73 29 - 1

SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cutting and patching not required to be performed as part of the work of other Sections.

2. Cutting and patching required to:

a. Install or correct ill-timed work.

b. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

c. Remove samples of installed work for testing.


1. Cutting and patching required for mechanical and electrical work.

1.2 DEFINITION

A. “Cutting and patching” is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, demolition and repair of

nominally completed and previously existing work in order to accommodate coordination of Work, installation

of Work, uncovering Work for access or inspection, and to obtain samples for testing or similar purposes. It is

defined to include integral cutting and patching during manufacturing, fabricating, erecting, and installation

processes for individual units of Work.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not reduce performance capacities, nor alter the physical and aesthetic characteristics of the Work as

determined by Architect, due to performance of cutting and patching.

B. Unless specifically designated otherwise, patch existing work cut, altered, or revised to accommodate new

work to duplicate undisturbed adjacent finishes, colors, textures, and profiles; finish new work in existing

portion to match adjacent work unless noted otherwise. Where there is dispute whether duplication is

successful or has been achieved to reasonable degree, Architect’s judgment shall be final.

C. Do not endanger any work by cutting or altering any part of it.

D. Achieve security, strength, protection where exposed to weather, and preserve continuity of existing fire ratings

with new patch.

E. Requirements for Structural Work:

1. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or

load-deflection ratio.

2. Obtain Architect’s review as proposed in submittal before proceeding with cutting and patching

primary and secondary structural components.

3. Where cutting and patching involves addition of reinforcement to structural elements, obtain details

and engineering calculations prepared by structural engineer of record showing how reinforcement is

to be integrated with original structure.

F. Operational and Safety Limitations:

1. Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in

reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased

operational life or safety.

2. Obtain Architect’s review as proposed in submittal before proceeding with cutting and patching

operating elements or safety related components:




01 73 29 - 2

a. Water, moisture, and vapor barriers.

b. Membranes and flashings.

c. Electrical wiring systems.

G. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior, in a manner that would, in

Architect’s opinion, result in lessening the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a

manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut and patch work. Remove and replace Work cut

and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

H. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of installation.

I. Remove and replace Work judged by Architect to be visually unsatisfactory.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

2. Coordinate layout of the work and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding with the work.

B. Scheduling:

1. Schedule cutting and patching to precede construction and be completed without delay.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Submit for approval materials, methods, or systems different from existing

work to be matched.

B. Samples: Only as requested.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of

use.

B. In other respects, meet manufacturer’s directions.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Meet manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

A. General Requirements:

1. Use materials for patching that are identical to existing materials appearance, quality, and

performance.

2. If identical materials or products are not available, or cannot be used, use materials and products that

match existing adjacent and similar surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual

effect and physical characteristics.

3. Use materials for patching that will result in equal–or-better performance characteristics.

B. Materials subject to Architect’s approval.




01 73 29 - 3

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. If any hazardous materials are encountered, notify Architect immediately and obtain instructions for safe

handling and removal.

B. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to

receive patching and finishing.

C. Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest

feasible time and complete without delay.

D. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, deviating only where advisable to achieve

good match and with Architect’s approval.

E. Restore work remaining in place that is damaged or defaced during this Contract to the condition existing at

time of award of the Contract.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Before Cutting Operations: Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which work is be

performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before

proceeding with the work.

B. Commencing of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Lay out cutting work at job site, and coordinate with related work for which cutting is required.

B. Review proposed layout with Architect prior to performing cutting operations.

C. Temporary Supports: Provide temporary shoring, bracing, and supports as required to maintain structural

integrity of affected portion of Work.

D. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

3.4 CUTTING

A. Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be retained or adjoining Work.

Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer’s

recommendations.

B. Make new openings neat; approximate profiles shown.

C. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent

surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

D. Concrete and Masonry:

1. Cut new openings in concrete and masonry by coring, saw cutting, or torching. Run-bys of saw will

not be permitted.

2. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.




01 73 29 - 4

3.5 PATCHING

A. Execute patching to complement adjacent Work.

B. Restore work that has been cut or removed. Restore work with new products to provide completed Work in

accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified tolerances,

finishes.

D. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, deviating only where advisable to achieve

good match.

E. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.

F. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.

G. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a

manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed.

B. Remove debris in accordance with requirements of Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and

Disposal.




Cleaning

01 74 00 - 1

SECTION 01 74 00 - CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: The requirements for progress and final cleaning of project and removal of waste,

debris, and rubbish.


A. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. .

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit VOC data sheets for cleaning materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not damage surfaces.

B. Use only materials and methods as recommended by manufacturer of material or surface being cleaned.

C. Cleaning materials to meet VOC requirements applicable to Project location.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Develop a program that addresses construction site cleanup and control of construction debris.

B. During construction period keep premises and public properties under Contractor’s control free from

accumulations of waste materials, debris, and rubbish, caused by operations. Maintain the site in a clean and

orderly condition. Clean newly installed Work as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction

period.

C. Clean and perform maintenance on installed work as frequently as necessary through remainder of the

construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging

effects.

D. Clean areas and spaces where work is performed and used for access to work. Remove paint, mortar, oils,

putty and items of similar nature.

1. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or

remote spaces, prior to enclosing space.

2. Thoroughly clean spaces where work has been performed.

3. Completely remove paint, mortar, , and materials of similar nature.

4. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar items, before painting or other finishing is applied.

5. Remove combustible materials such as paper and cardboard daily.

6. Prevent accumulations of wastes that create hazardous conditions

7. Remove debris daily.



Cleaning

01 74 00 - 2

8. Thoroughly clean spaces where work has been performed.

E. Remove all dirt, gravel, rubbish, refuse, and green waste from sidewalks, street pavement, and storm drains

adjoining the project site. During wet weather, avoid driving vehicles off paved areas and other outdoor work.

F. Ensure adequate workers, cleaning materials, and equipment are always available.

G. Make adequate provisions to prevent dust and debris from being carried, blown, or otherwise transported

outside the immediate area of operation.

H. Remove combustible materials such as paper and cardboard daily. Prevent accumulations of wastes that create

hazardous conditions.

I. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Provide a collection can at

each location used as an eating area. Pick up all garbage daily.

J. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw materials from

heights.

K. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall

on wet, newly painted surfaces.

L. Paved Areas: Clean (“broom clean”) debris and soil from paved sidewalks, roadways and parking areas

immediately following completion of earthwork activities.

M. Dust Controls: Refer to Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls for dust control requirements.

N. Requirements of this Section are in addition to cleaning specified in other Sections.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning. Cleaning company must be approved by Owner prior to

starting work.

B. At completion of work, remove lingering debris and sweep area clean prior to final cleaning.

C. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.

D. Clean the entire construction area and adjacent areas affected by the performance of Work under this Contract.

E. Clean each surface or unit of work to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building’s cleaning and

maintenance program.

F. Comply with requirements of material and product manufacturer and with requirements for cleaning contained

in other Sections of the Specifications. Where other Sections are more specific or demanding, they shall

govern.

G. Complete final cleaning before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion.

H. Final cleaning includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Remove labels that are not required as permanent labels.

2. Clean sight-exposed interior and exterior hard-surfaced finishes, to a dust-free condition, free of

fingerprints, stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Remove dust with treated dust cloths and

vacuums.

3. Clean and damp mop hard-surface floors as specified.



Cleaning

01 74 00 - 3

4. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition,

removing substances that are noticeable as vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken

glass and other damaged transparent materials.

5. Clean and polish exposed hard and glossy surfaces.

6. Remove paint splatters, spots, stains, and foreign matter from hardware or other factory finished

surfaces or surfaces not to be painted.

7. Wipe surfaces of equipment clean. Remove excess lubrication and other substances.

8. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting from water

exposure.

9. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. Replace burned out electric

lamps.

10. Remove waste, debris, and foreign matter from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

11. Clean debris from new and existing drainage systems.

12. Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom clean.

13. Sweep clean and wash down all exterior pavement surfaces; remove stains, spills and foreign

substances including grease and oil deposited on pavement by Contractor’s vehicles.

14. Clean project site, including landscape developed areas, of litter and foreign matter. Rake grounds

that are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even-textured surface.

I. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Architect, remove temporary protection

devices and facilities, which were installed during course of the work to protect previously, completed work

during remainder of construction period.

J. Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection, and rid the project of rodents,

insects, and other pests.

K. Maintain cleaning until Substantial Completion. Owner will assume responsibility for cleaning after

Substantial Completion.

L. Where extra materials of value remain, dispose of these to Owner’s best advantage as directed.

3.3 WASTE, DEBRIS, AND RUBBISH REMOVAL

A. The following requirements are in addition to requirement specified in Section 01 74 29 – Construction Waste

Management and Disposal.

B. Remove waste, debris, rubbish and surplus materials daily from the project site.

C. Remove temporary construction facilities from the project site.

D. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at legal public or private dumping

areas off Owner’s property. Do not bury or burn waste materials at the site. Do not discharge volatile, harmful

or dangerous materials into drainage systems.

E. Place covers over debris boxes between periods when they are being filled.

F. Refer to Section 01 35 00 – Special Procedures for additional requirements for disposal operations.

3.4 TOUCH UP AND REPAIR

A. If any surface, material or equipment has been damaged, touch up and repair exposed areas; such repair to be

approved by Architect.




Construction Waste Management and Disposal

01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from

construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective

demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or

deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the

Work.

1.3 PLAN REQUIREMENTS

A. Intent:

1. Divert demolition, construction, and land clearing debris from landfill disposal.

2. Redirect recyclable material back to manufacturing process.

3. Generate cost savings or increase minimal additional cost to Project for waste disposal.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Demolition and Construction Waste Management Plan: Submit three copies of plan within 7 calendar days

of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Prior to Substantial Completion, submit three copies of report. Include

separate reports for demolition and construction waste. Include the following information:

1. Material category.

2. Generation point of waste.

3. Total quantity of waste in tons.

4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.

5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.

6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.

7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit 3 copies of calculated

end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the

Work.




01 74 19 - 2

D. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and

organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by

recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and

invoices.

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and

incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering

refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed

according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

1.5 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. Develop plan consisting of waste identification and waste reduction work plan. Include separate sections in

plan for demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of

measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Plan to describe methods and procedures for implementation and monitoring compliance including the

following:

1. Transportation company hauling construction waste to waste processing facilities.

2. Recycling and adaptive reuse processing facilities and waste type each facility will accept.

3. Demolition and construction waste materials anticipated for recycling and adaptive reuse.

4. On site sorting and site storage methods.

C. Implement demolition and construction waste management plan at start of demolition and construction.

D. Review demolition and construction waste management plan at pre-construction meeting and progress

meeting specified in Section 01 31 19 - Project Meetings.

E. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing, and

construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

F. Distribute approved demolition and construction waste management plan to subcontractors and others

affected by Plan Requirements.

G. Oversee implementation, instruct demolition and construction personnel for plan compliance, and document

plan results.

H. Purchase products to prevent waste by:

1. Ensuring correct quantity of each material is delivered to site.

2. Choosing products with minimal or no packaging.

3. Requiring suppliers to use returnable pallets or containers.

4. Requiring suppliers to take or buy-back rejects or unused items.

1.6 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE RECYCLING

A. Use source separation method or co-mingling method suitable to sorting and processing method of selected

recycling center. Dispose non-recyclable trash separately into landfill.

B. Source Separation Method: Recyclable materials separated from trash and sorted into separate bins or

containers, identified by waste type, prior to transportation to recycling center.




01 74 19 - 3

C. Co-Mingling Method: Recyclable materials separated from trash and placed in unsorted bins or container

for sorting at recycling center.

D. Materials suggested for recycling include:

1. Demolition Waste:

a. Asphaltic concrete paving.

b. Concrete.

c. Concrete reinforcing steel.

2. Construction Waste:

a. Site-clearing waste.

b. Lumber.

c. Metals.

d. Roofing.

e. Piping.

f. Electrical conduit.

3. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of

the following uncontaminated packaging materials:

a. Paper.

b. Cardboard.

c. Boxes.

d. Plastic sheet and film.

e. Polystyrene packaging.

f. Wood crates.

g. Plastic pails.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures

related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Management

Coordinator.

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and

bins needed to avoid delays.

4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal

facilities.

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect. Provide handling, containers, storage,

signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire

duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with Section 01 50 00- Temporary Facilities and Controls for governing temporary

facilities and controls for operation, termination, and removal requirements.

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as

appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.




01 74 19 - 4

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within 3 days of submittal return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan

procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum

interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be

salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Section 01 50 00- Temporary Facilities and Controls for controlling dust and dirt,

environmental protection, and noise control.

D. Collect demolition and construction waste materials in marked bins or containers and arrange for

transportation to recycling centers or adaptive salvage and reuse processing facilities.

E. Location for storing demolition and construction waste and recycling material will be designated by Owner.

F. Store demolition and construction waste materials to prevent environmental pollution, fire hazards, hazards

to persons and property, and contamination of stored materials.

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. Maintain recycling and reuse storage and collection area in orderly arrangement with materials separated to

eliminate co-mingling of materials required to be delivered separately to waste processing facility.

B. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable

waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are

removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container

and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if

found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and

shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Cover construction waste materials subject to disintegration, evaporation, settling, or runoff to

prevent polluting air, water, and soil.

4. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

5. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.

6. Remove recyclable waste off Owner’s property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 4-inch (100-mm) size.

3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.

3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site.

For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with

requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for

recycling wood.

B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees off site or on-site location designated by AOC.




01 74 19 - 5

C. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.

2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from

Project site and deliver to legally dispose of them in a landfill, incinerator, or other legal disposal facility.

Obtain receipt for deliveries.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate

on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.




Protecting Installed Construction

01 76 00 - 1

SECTION 01 76 00 - PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: Basic requirements for protecting installed Work.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Protect all installed construction until completion and Owner's acceptance of the Work.

B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections.

C. Limit Exposure of Work:

1. Use control and protection methods and supervise performance of Work to ensure that none of the

Work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or

otherwise deleterious exposures during construction period.

2. Exposures include (where applicable), but are not necessarily limited to static loading, dynamic

loading, internal pressures, external pressures, high or low temperatures, thermal shock, high or

low humidity, air contamination or pollution water, ice, solvents, chemicals, light, radiation,

puncture abrasion, heavy traffic, soiling, bacteria, insect infestation, combustion, electrical current,

high-speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear, misuse, incompatible interface,

destructive testing, misalignment, excessive weathering, unprotected storage, improper

shipping/handling, theft, and vandalism.

D. Provide suitable temporary and removable protective materials and methods are necessary to avoid damage or

deterioration to installed products, materials, equipment, finishes, and other installed construction due to

traffic, construction operations, from action of the elements, from carelessness of Contractor's employees or

subcontractors and their employees, from vandalism, and from any other cause until completion and Owner's

acceptance of the Work.

E. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

F. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and

adjacent to traffic areas.

G. Protect finished floors and other surfaces from traffic from dirt, wear, and damage:

1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic.

2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects.

3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place in areas where storage of products will occur.

H. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces:

1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.

2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from

waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of

activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas.



Protecting Installed Construction

01 76 00 - 2

I. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas.

J. Protect all exterior work, including existing asphalt paving and landscaping and building.

K. Care shall be exercised to prevent damage to adjacent facilities including walks, curbs, and gutters; where

equipment will pass over these obstructions suitable planking shall be placed, and damaged facilities, due to

Contractor’s operations, shall be removed and replaced at Contractor’s expense.

L. Contractor shall be responsible for overloading of any part or parts of structures beyond their safe

calculated carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery or any other item

thereon. No loads shall be placed on floors or roofs before they have attained their permanent and safe

strength.

M. All existing improvements and facilities shall be protected from damage of any type resulting from the

operations, equipment or workers of Contractor during the course of construction.

N. Where existing utilities are damaged or disrupted on account of any act, omission, neglect or misconduct by

Contractor in the manner or method of executing the work, or due to non-execution of work, such damage

shall be immediately repaired to maintain operation regardless of the time of occurrence.

O. Provide temporary construction necessary for protection of the building and its parts. Close in buildings as

soon as possible as protection from the weather and vandalism. Protect existing buildings and controlled

temperature areas from damage.

P. Protect doors and frames and hardware from mechanical damage and damage to finishes.

Q. Final responsibility for protection rests with Contractor.

R. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired and restored to its original condition without additional cost

to Owner.

S. Repair or replace all damaged work promptly as directed by Architect.

T. Remove protective materials when no longer needed.




Closeout Procedures

01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: Procedures for the following subjects are covered in this section.

1. Substantial Completion.

2. Final acceptance.

3. Closeout submittals.

4. Final adjustment of accounts.

5. Final Application for Payment.

1.2 GENERAL

A. Comply with requirements stated in the General Conditions and in Specification Sections for administrative

procedures in closing out the Work.

B. Where the requirements in this or other sections of the Specifications are more specific or more demanding,

they shall take precedence over the more general and less demanding requirements of the General Conditions.

C. Definition: Project closeout is the term used to describe certain collective project requirements, indicating

completion of the Work, that are to be fulfilled near the end of the Contract Time in preparation for the final

acceptance and occupancy of the Work by Owner, as well as final payment to Contractor and normal

termination of the Contract.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Contractor’s Notice of Substantial Completion: When the Work, in the opinion of Contractor, is substantially

complete, submit the following to Architect.

1. A written notice that the Work or a designated portion thereof, is substantially complete.

2. A detailed and comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected.

3. Certification that the equipment has been tested and is operational and Owner’s maintenance

personnel have received the specified instruction/training.

B. Architect’s Review:

1. Within a reasonable time after receipt of Contractor’s Notice of Substantial Completion; Architect will

review the list of items to be complete and corrected and review the work to determine whether or not

the Work, or designated portion thereof, is ready for Substantial Completion Inspection.

2. Should Architect determine that the Work is not ready for Substantial Completion Inspection Architect

will notify the Contractor in writing. Architect will return Contractor’s list of items to be completed

and corrected noting items that must be completed and corrected prior to commencement of the

Substantial Completion Inspection.

3. Contractor is to promptly complete and correct the items noted and listed by Architect. When the

items noted and listed are completed and corrected submit another Contractor’s Notice of Substantial

Completion. Include the list of items to be completed and corrected noting on the list the date along

with Contractor’s Superintendent or Project Manager’s initials for each item that was completed or

corrected.

4. Architect will again review Contractor’s Notice of Substantial Completion and the Work to determine

whether or not the Work or a designated portion thereof, is ready for Substantial Completion

Inspection.



Closeout Procedures

01 77 00 - 2

C. Substantial Completion Inspection:

1. Architect will conduct a Substantial Completion Inspection when Architect determines the Work is

ready.

2. During the inspection Architect will prepare a Punch List of items to be completed.

3. Architect will transmit to Punch List to Contractor and will advise Contractor as to the items that must

be completed and corrected to achieve Substantial Completion.

D. Certificate of Substantial Completion:

1. When the specific Punch List items have been completed or corrected, Architect will prepare a

Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions and

attach a list of remaining work to be completed and corrected.

2. Architect will submit the Certificate to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the

responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.

1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. When Contractor considers the Work is complete, submit written certification that:

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.

2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.

3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and lists of deficiencies attached

to Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.

4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, and are fully operational.

5. Operation of systems has been demonstrated to Owner’s personnel.

6. Work is completed and ready for final inspection.

B. Architect will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt of

such certification.

C. Should Architect consider that the Work is incomplete or defective:

1. Architect will promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work.

2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the state of deficiencies, and send a second written

certification to Architect that the Work is complete.

3. Architect will reinspect the Work.

D. When Architect finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he shall request Contractor to

make closeout submittals.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to the closeout submittals required by Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals provide the

following:

1. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities.

2. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with the General Conditions.

3. Consent of Surety to Final Payment.

4. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations: In accordance with the General

Conditions.

1.6 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS

A. Submit a final statement of accounting to Architect.

B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum:

1. The original Contract Sum.

2. Additions and deductions resulting from:

a. Previous Change Orders.



Closeout Procedures

01 77 00 - 3

b. Deductions for uncorrected Work.

c. Other adjustments.

3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.

4. Previous payments.

5. Sum remaining due.

C. Architect will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract Sum which were

not previously made by Change Orders.

1.7 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the General

Conditions.

B. Architect will not sign the final Certificate for Payment until all of the work required by Contract Documents

has been completed and all closeout submittals have been submitted and approved.






Closeout Submittals

01 78 00 - 1

SECTION 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: Procedures for submitting the following types of closeout submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Guarantees/Warranties and Maintenance Contracts.

3. Project Record Documents.

4. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.

1.2 GENERAL

A. Comply with requirements stated in General Conditions and in Specification Sections for administrative

procedures in closeout submittals.

B. Where the requirements in this or other sections of the Specifications are more specific or more demanding,

they shall take precedence over the more general and demanding requirements of the General Conditions.

1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Format:

1. Operation and maintenance data to consist of written text and drawings prepared in the form of on

instructional manual and submitted in binders.

2. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic

covers, 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related

consistent groupings.

3. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

DATA”; Project title; and subject matter of contents.

4. Contents: Arrange content under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project

Manual.

5. Tabs: Provide tabs for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major

component parts of equipment.

6. Text: Preprinted data or original typewritten data on 8-1/2 by 11 inch, 20 pound paper.

7. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size

of text pages.

B. Contents:

1. Title Page: Provide title page similar to Project Manual Title Page including project name and

location, date, Owner’s name and address, Contractor’s name and address, and Architect’s name,

address, and project number.

2. Table of Contents: List each product and system included in the manual. If more than one binder is

required, indicate what is included in each binder.

3. Project Directory: Provide a directory listing all entities involved in the Project including Owner and

their consultants, Architect and their consultants, and Contractor and their subcontractors and material

suppliers. For each listing, include firm name, address, telephone number, and responsible principal.

4. Requested Information: For each product, material, item of equipment and system provide the

following:

a. Name, address, telephone number, and responsible principal for material supplier,

manufacturer, and subcontractor as appropriate, identifying the area of responsibility for

each.

b. Name, address and telephone number of local source of maintenance products and materials,

space parts and replacements.



Closeout Submittals

01 78 00 - 2

c. Name, address and telephone number of approved maintenance contractor or service agency

closest to project, as appropriate.

d. Identify each product, material, and item of equipment by manufacturer’s name, trade name,

and model number.

e. Product information as described below.

f. Instructions for care and maintenance of materials and finishes as described below.

g. Instructions for operation and maintenance of equipment and systems as described below.

h. Description of operating procedures as described below.

i. Copies of applicable performance tests.

j. Copies of applicable warranty, guaranty, and maintenance contracts.

5. Product Information: Include as a minimum the following:

a. Product data for all products, materials and items of equipment. Include only those sheets

that are pertinent to the specific product. Annotate each sheet to:

1) Clearly identify the specific product or part installed.

2) Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation.

3) Delete references to inapplicable information.

b. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary.

1) Coordinate drawings with information on Project Record Documents to assure

correct illustration of completed installation.

2) Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

c. Written text as required supplementing product data for the particular installation for all

mechanical, electrical, plumbing, heating, air conditioning, security, hardware, and

communication systems.

1) Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.

2) Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.

d. Information required for re-ordering special manufactured products.

6. Instructions for Care and Maintenance of Materials and Finishes: Include as a minimum the

following:

a. Manufacturer’s recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.

b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to the product.

c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

d. For moisture protection and weather exposed products, also include recommendations for

inspections, maintenance and repair.

7. Instructions for Operation and Maintenance of Equipment and System: Include the following

information for each item of equipment and system as appropriate.

a. Description equipment or system and component parts.

1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests.

3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.

b. Operating Procedures: Describe, in detail, the procedures and directions required to

properly and safely operate the equipment and system. Include as a minimum the following:

1) Start-up, break-in, route and normal operating instructions and sequences.

2) Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions.

3) Operation, calibration and adjustment of controls.

4) Summer and winter operating instructions.

5) Special operating instructions.

6) Manufacturer’s printed operating instructions.

c. Maintenance Procedures: Describe, in detail, the procedures and materials required to

properly maintain the appearance, usefulness and operation of equipment and systems.

Include as a minimum the following.

1) Routine operations.

2) Guide to “trouble-shooting”.

3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly.

4) Alignment, adjusting and checking.

5) Schedule for recommended service, lubrication and preventative maintenance.



Closeout Submittals

01 78 00 - 3

6) Manufacturer’s printed maintenance instructions.

7) Parts Lists: Include name of manufacturer, address, telephone number, type of

equipment, model number, serial number, and the name, catalog number, current

price and availability of the component parts of each piece of equipment. Provide

exploded views of the more complex items.

8) List of Spare Parts and Consumable or Bulk Supplies: These lists shall be the

manufacturer’s recommended inventory of “on hand” spare parts and consumable

or bulk supplies (fuel, lubricants, refrigerant, and similar items.) to maintain his

equipment in proper operating condition for a period of two years. These lists shall

essentially include the same information required of the parts lists.

9) Lists of tools (standard and special hand tools, portable and fixed test equipment,

machine tools, handling equipment) for performing all maintenance tasks. Identify

those items being furnished versus those recommended, but not furnished.

d. Other Information:

1) As installed control diagrams and color coded wiring and piping diagrams.

2) Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.

3) Circuit directories of panelboards.

4) Electrical service.

5) Controls.

6) Communications.

7) Additional data that becomes apparent during instruction/training sessions.

C. Submittals:

1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of

Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by

Owner, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.

3. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. Copy will be

returned after final inspection, with comments. No final inspection will be made until the required

data has been submitted and found to be satisfactory.

4. Submit six copies of revised volumes of data in final form within 10 days after final inspection.

1.4 GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS

A. Responsibility: General Conditions covers Contractor’s responsibility to remedy defects due to faulty

workmanship and materials that shall appear within one year from the date of project acceptance.

B. Form of Guarantees/Warranties:

1. Submit guarantee/warranty typed on Contractor’s letterhead, in a form acceptable to Owner, when

required by Specification Section.

2. Make warranties/guarantees out in the name of Owner, not Contractor or material supplier.

C. Form of Submittal:

1. Bind guarantees, warranties, and maintenance contracts into binders.

2. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic

covers, 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related

consistent groupings.

3. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title “GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES AND

MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS”, Project title, and identify subject matter of contents.

4. Contents: Arrange content under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project

Manual.

5. Tabs: Provide tabs for each separate section. Include all documents (guarantees/warranties and

maintenance agreements) related to that section of work behind the tab.



Closeout Submittals

01 78 00 - 4

D. Preparation of Submittal:

1. Contents:

a. Title Page: Provide title page similar to Project Manual Title Page including project name

and location, date, Owner’s name and address, Contractor’s name and address, and

Architect’s name, address, and project number.

b. Table of Contents: List each product and system included in the manual. If more than one

binder is required, indicate what is included in each binder.

2. Compile the guarantees/warranties and maintenance contracts specified in respective sections of the

Specification.

3. Review documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. Verify that documents are in proper

form, contain full information, and are notarized.

4. For each guarantee/warranty and maintenance contract include the following:

a. Name, address, telephone number, and responsible principal of material supplier,

manufacturer, and subcontractor as appropriate.

b. Beginning date and duration.

c. Proper procedure in case of failure.

d. Instances that might affect guarantees/warranty and maintenance contract.

5. Obtain guarantees/warranties, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and

manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item or work. Except for items put

into use with Owner’s permission, leave date of beginning of time of guarantee/warranty until the

Date of Final Completion is determined.

6. Where there is no specific guarantee/warranty specified, but one is typically provided by the product

manufacturer for the product specified, provide Owner with the manufacturer’s standard

guarantee/warranty.

7. Co-execute submittals when required.

E. Submittal:

1. Submit two complete sets of guarantees/warranties and maintenance contracts.

2. Provide additional copies of guarantees/warranties and maintenance contracts for inclusion in

Operations and Maintenance Manual.

F. Time of Submittals:

1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner’s

permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.

2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final inspection.

3. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within

ten days after acceptance, listing the date of Final Completion as the beginning of the warranty period.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintenance of Documents and Samples;

1. Record Documents: Maintain at the site, separate from documents used for construction, one copy of

each of the following:

a. Full size set Contract Drawings, one set for Contractor and one set for each major

subcontractor.

b. Project Manual, one set for Contractor and one set for each major subcontractor.

c. Addenda.

d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

e. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, samples, and other submittals.

f. Requests for Information.

g. Field test records.

h. Inspection certificates.

i. Manufacturer’s certificates.

2. Do not use Record Documents for construction.



Closeout Submittals

01 78 00 - 5

3. Owner will, at beginning of Project and at no cost, provide Contractor with a set of Contract

Documents to use for recording the “As-Built” conditions of the Work.

4. Store Record Documents in Contractor’s Field Office apart from documents used for construction.

Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents.

5. Label and file Record Documents in accordance with Section number listings in Table of Contents of

this Project Manual. Label each document “PROJECT RECORD” in neat, large, printed letters.

6. Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for

construction purposes.

7. Ensure that each major subcontractor maintains their set of Record Documents currently and that the

documents are in good condition and reflect as-built condition of the Work.

8. Keep Record Documents up to date during entire progress of the Work, a condition required for

processing monthly progress payments.

9. Keep Record Documents available all times for inspection by Architect.

B. Recording:

1. Record information on a set of Contract Drawings, and in a copy of a Project Manual. Contractor and

each major subcontractor shall each maintain their own sets.

2. Record information carefully and neatly with block lettering by a competent drafter, familiar with the

trade involved, using methods acceptable to Architect.

3. Record sufficient information so Work concealed in the building may be located with reasonable ease

and accuracy. Accomplish by dimensioning or by stating the relationship to spaces in the building

near which the Work was installed. Architect decision on what constitutes sufficient information will

be final.

4. Recording:

a. Record information concurrently with the construction process.

b. Give particular attention to work that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.

c. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.

d. Completely, accurately, and legibly record actual locations and arrangements of all

installations differing from Contract Drawings, or if shown only diagrammatically on the

Contract Drawings, or if left to Contractor’s option.

e. Use additional copies of prints, if necessary, to insure legible recording of data.

f. Refer to the document that authorized the change. Where no dated instrument generated the

change, note the date the change was made in the field.

g. Call attention to the entry by drawing a “cloud” around the area affected.

h. In case of overlapping changes, use different colors for each change.

5. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction,

including:

a. Location of significant Work concealed inside the building, locations of which are changed

by Contractor from those shown on the Drawings.

b. Location of item, not necessarily concealed, which vary from locations shown on the

drawings.

c. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.

d. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances

referenced to permanent surface improvements.

e. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.

f. Record changes in size location, and other features of installation shown on the Drawings.

g. Reflected ceiling plan with log list of junction boxes and valve numbers, functions, and

locations, keyed to numbered access panels identified on the plan.

h. Actual numbering of each electrical circuit.

i. Field changes of dimension and detail.

j. Changes made by Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

k. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

l. References to related shop drawings and Modifications.



Closeout Submittals

01 78 00 - 6

6. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:

a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product, material and item

of equipment actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.

b. Changes made by Addenda, Change Orders, Field Orders, Clarifications and Interpretations

made by Letters of Instruction, and other modifications to the Contract.

7. Other Documents: Maintain manufacturer’s certifications, inspection certifications, field test records,

and items required by individual Specifications sections.

8. Prior to submitting each request for payment, secure approval from Architect of the current status of

Record Documents.

9. Obtain Architect’s Approval of Record Drawings prior to ceiling close-up.

10. Periodic payments or portions thereof to Contractor may be withheld until Architect verifies that all

as-built information to date has been properly recorded on Record Documents.

C. Conversion of Schematic Layouts:

1. In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items are

shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Accurately record the

final physical arrangement as determined by Contractor, subject to the approval of Architect.

2. Show on the job set of Record Drawings, by dimension accurate to one-inch, the centerline of each

run of all items specified in the preceding paragraph.

a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as “cast iron drain”, or “galvanized flashing”.

b. Show by symbol or note the vertical location of the item (“6-inches below slab”, “in ceiling

plenum”, “exposed”, or similar notes)

c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the

Specifications.

D. Final Project Record Drawings:

1. At a time nearing Substantial Completion of the work, obtain from Architect at no charge to

Contractor one complete set of mylar based sepia transparencies of all Drawings in the Contract.

2. At a time nearing Substantial Completion of the work, obtain from Architect at no charge to

Contractor Computer Assisted Drawing (CAD) electronic file (AutoCad) of all Drawings in the

Contract.

3. Obtain approval from Architect of data recorded on the Record Drawing prints prior to transferring

data to mylars.

4. After Substantial Completion, carefully transfer all data shown on the job set of Record Drawing

prints to the corresponding transparencies, coordinating the information as required.

5. Provide line weights and lettering quality that meets or exceeds that of the original Contract

Drawings.

6. Stamp each record drawing with the following information:

a. Project Record Document.

b. Prepared by: Contractor’s name, permanent address.

c. Date prepared:

d. Contractor’s signature.

E. Submittal:

1. Submit complete set of Project Record Documents to Architect 10 days after final inspection.

2. Make any required changes and promptly deliver final Project Record Documents to Architect.

3. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter as specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

1.6 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual Specification

Sections.

B. Deliver spare parts and maintenance materials to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain

receipt prior to final payments.



Closeout Submittals

01 78 00 - 7






Geotechnical Investigation

02 32 00 - 1

SECTION 02 320 00 - GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section references subsurface geotechnical (soil) investigation prepared for Owner's purposes and made

available to Contractor for his information.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Geotechnical Engineer: When referred to in Contract Documents for this Project, the Geotechnical

Engineer is the person or testing agency named above as having made the subsurface geotechnical

investigation.

1.3 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

A. Title: Geotechnical Report for Proposed restroom structure Scenic Road

B. Date: September 9, 2013.

C. Author: Beacon Geotechnical, Inc., P.O. Box 4814, Paso Robles, California 93447

D. Project No.: F-100853

E. Copy of the report is attached at the end of this Section.

1.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCURACY OF SITE DATA

A. The authors or surveyors are responsible for accuracy of site data; Owner does not guarantee their accuracy nor

their adequacy, nor that data is representative of all conditions Contractor may encounter at the site.

B. Contractor shall assume responsibility for results of acting on conclusions he draws from these data; if he

chooses not to accept such responsibility, he shall employ his own experts to determine additional information

and he shall be responsible for results of acting on conclusions from information obtained on his own initiative.


A. Based on recommendations contained in the investigative report, a foundation system, with assumed design

bearing pressures as engineered, shown, and noted, has been assumed as being uniform and appropriate to

satisfy construction conditions at the Project Site.

1. These assumptions must be professionally and expertly verified and corroborated by Geotechnical

Engineer or Owner's testing and inspection agency, as indicated, when excavation has been

opened.

2. Should opened excavation indicate that actual soil conditions are variable, erratic, or contrary to

assumed conditions, notify Architect for instruction before proceeding with foundation Work.




Geotechnical Engineering Report

For

Proposed Restroom Structure

Scenic Road

APN 010294001000

Carmel by the Sea, California

September 9, 2013

F-100853

Prepared For

City of Carmel by the Sea

By

Beacon Geotechnical, Inc. P.O. Box 4814

Paso Robles, California 93447

September 9, 2013 F-100853 City of Carmel by the Sea P.O. Box CC Carmel, CA 93921 Project: Proposed Restroom Structure Scenic Road APN 010294001000 Carmel by the Sea, California Subject: Geotechnical Engineering Report As authorized, we have performed a Geotechnical Study for the above referenced project. The accompanying Geotechnical Engineering Report presents the results of our subsurface exploration, laboratory-testing program and conclusions and recommendations for geotechnical engineering aspects of project design. Our services were performed using the standard of care ordinarily exercised in this locality at the time this report was prepared. Based on our study, it is our opinion that the site is suitable for the proposed development from a geotechnical engineering standpoint provided the recommendations of this report are successfully implemented. We have appreciated this opportunity to be of service to you on this project. Please call if you have any questions, or if we can be of further service. Respectfully submitted, Beacon Geotechnical, Inc.

Greg McKay Project Manager Copies: 3-City of Carmel by the Sea 1-File

Nicholas A. McClure Geotechnical Engineer

F-100853 September 9, 2013

1

Contents 1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 2 1.1 Description................................................................................................. 2

2 SCOPE OF WORK ..................................................................................... 2 2.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................... 2

2.2 Report Contents ......................................................................................... 2

3 SITE SETTING .......................................................................................... 3 3.1 Location. .................................................................................................... 3

3.2 Site Description . ....................................................................................... 3

4 SITE CONDITIONS ................................................................................... 3 4.1 Soil Conditions ........................................................................................... 3

4.2 Groundwater .............................................................................................. 3

5 SEISMIC HAZARDS ................................................................................... 3 5.1 Nearby Faults ............................................................................................. 3

5.2 Liquefaction ............................................................................................... 4

5.3 Landslide Hazards ....................................................................................... 4

5.4 Seismic Design Parameters .......................................................................... 4

6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................. 5 6.1 General Grading ......................................................................................... 5

6.2 Specific Site Development, Grading Pads, and Foundation Excavations ............ 6

6.3 Slope Construction ...................................................................................... 7

6.4 Utility Trenches .......................................................................................... 8

6.5 Structural Design – Foundations .................................................................. 8

6.6 Slabs on Grade ........................................................................................... 9

6.7 Structural Design – Lateral Resistance Parameters ........................................ 9

6.8 Structural Design – Settlement Considerations .............................................. 9

6.9 Structural Design – Retaining Walls ............................................................ 10

7 REFERENCES CITED ............................................................................... 11 8 ADDITIONAL SERVICES .......................................................................... 11 9 PROJECT LIMITATIONS AND UNIFORMITY OF CONDITIONS .................... 11

F-100853 September 9, 2013

2

1. INTRODUCTION

This report presents results of a Geotechnical Engineering Study performed for the proposed restroom structure to be located in the City of Carmel by the Sea, California.

1.1 Description

1.1.1. It should be noted that grading and foundation plans were not provided for the purpose of this report. Prior to any construction, this firm should review the grading and foundation plans to verify or modify the recommendations offered herein. We anticipate that the site will be developed by cutting and filling up to two (2) feet to create a level pad.

1.1.2. The proposed structure is assumed to be one (1) story of wood framed or concrete construction.

1.1.3. Structural considerations for maximum wall loads of 1.75 kips per square foot and maximum point loads of 20.0 kips were used as a basis for the recommendations of this report. If actual loads vary significantly from these assumed loads, Beacon Geotechnical, Inc. should be notified as re-evaluation of the recommendations contained herein may be required.

2 SCOPE OF WORK

2.1 The purpose of the geotechnical investigation that led to this report was to evaluate the soil conditions of the site with respect to the proposed development. These conditions include surface and subsurface soil types, expansion potential, settlement potential, bearing capacity, and presence or absence of subsurface water. The scope of our work included:

• Reconnaissance of the site.

• Drilling, sampling and logging of two (2) borings to investigate soils and groundwater conditions.

• Laboratory testing of soil samples obtained from subsurface exploration to determine their physical and engineering properties.

• Geotechnical analysis of the data obtained.

• Consultation with owner representatives and design professionals. • Preparation of this report.

2.2 Contained in the report are:

• Discussions on local soil and groundwater conditions. • Results of laboratory and field tests. • Conclusions and recommendations pertaining to site grading and structural design.

F-100853 September 9, 2013

3

3 SITE SETTING

3.1 The site of the proposed development is located in City of Carmel by the Sea, California, with the approximate geographical coordinates 36°32’44.05”N and 121°55’45.91”W. See the Vicinity Map in Appendix A.

3.2 The site is sloping slightly from the south to north and contains brush and trees.

4 SITE CONDITIONS

4.1 Soil Conditions

4.1.1 Evaluation of the subsurface indicates that soils are generally brown silty sand overlain by light brown and brown silty sand.

4.1.2 Soils encountered at approximate bearing depths should be designed as Site Classification D in accordance with the local building code.

4.1.3 Expansion determination indicates that the bearing soils lie in the “Very Low” range.

4.2 Groundwater

4.2.1 Groundwater was not encountered to a maximum depth of fifteen (15) feet.

5 SEISMIC HAZARDS This portion of Central California is subject to significant seismic hazards from moderate to large earthquake events. Ground shaking resulting from earthquakes is the primary geologic hazard at the project site. Ground displacement resulting from faulting is a potential hazard at or near faults.

5.1 Nearby Faults

5.1.1 The site does not lie within an Earthquake Fault Zone identified on a State of California Earthquake Fault Zone Map.

5.1.2 Faults closest to the site, which would most affect the proposed project:

Nearby Active Faults Approximate Distance (km) Magnitude MW

San Gregorio Fault

Monterey Bay Fault

San Andreas Fault Zone

5.6

7.2

61.0

7.5

7.3

8.0

F-100853 September 9, 2013

4

5.2 Liquefaction

Earthquake-induced vibrations can be the cause of several significant phenomena, including liquefaction in fine sands and silty sands. Liquefaction results in a complete loss of strength and can cause structures to settle or even overturn if it occurs in the bearing zone. If liquefaction occurs beneath sloping ground, a phenomenon known as lateral spreading can occur. Liquefaction is typically limited to the upper 50 feet of the subsurface soils and to soils that have a relative density of less than 70%. 5.2.1 Based on the quality and conditions of the in-place soils and the

absence of groundwater in our boring explorations, it is our opinion that the potential for liquefaction and/or lateral spreading is low at this site.

5.3 Landslide Hazards

5.3.1 The site topography and exposed soils types indicate that the potential for landslides is minimal at this site. Furthermore, no evidence of previous landslides was observed at the site.

5.4 Seismic Design Parameters

The following estimated ground motion parameters have been established using the methods outlined in the 2010 California Building Code with reference to the acceleration contour maps provided by the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) and the National Seismic Hazard Mapping Project (NSHMP). These ground motion parameters represent the Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCE) spectral response of seismic events experiencing 5 percent damped acceleration and having a 2 percent probability of exceedance within a 50 year period.

2010 California Building Code Seismic Parameters

Parameter Value

Seismic Design Category D Site Class D Short Period Spectral Acceleration, Ss 1.659 1-second period spectral acceleration, S1 0.711 Short period site coefficient, Fa 1.000

1-second period site coefficient, Fv 1.500

Adjusted short period spectral acceleration, Sms 1.659

Adjusted 1-second period spectral acceleration, Sm1 1.067

Short period design spectral acceleration, SDS 1.106 1-second period design spectral acceleration, SD1 0.711

F-100853 September 9, 2013

5

6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

The site is suitable for the proposed development from a geotechnical engineering standpoint provided the recommendations contained herein are properly implemented into the project. 6.1 General Grading

6.1.1 Grading, at a minimum, should conform to Chapter 18, and any additional locally approved appendices relating to grading, of the 2010 California Building Code.

6.1.2 The existing ground surface should be initially prepared for grading by removing all vegetation, trees, large roots, debris, non-complying fill and all other organic material. Voids created by removal of such material should not be backfilled unless the underlying soils have been observed by a representative of this firm.

6.1.3 The bottom of all excavations should be observed by a representative of this firm prior to processing or placing fill.

6.1.4 Fill and backfill placed at near optimum moisture in layers with loose thickness not greater than eight (8) inches should be compacted to a minimum of 90% of maximum dry density obtainable by the ASTM D 1557 Test Method.

6.1.5 Import soils used to raise site grade should be equal to or better than on-site soils in strength, expansion and compressibility characteristics. Import soils can be evaluated, but will not be pre-qualified by the geotechnical engineering firm. Final comments on the characteristics of the import soils will be offered after the material is at the project site.

6.1.6 Roof draining systems should be designed so that water is not discharged onto bearing soils or near structures.

6.1.7 Final site grade should be such that all water is permanently diverted away from the structure and is not allowed to pond. The ground immediately adjacent to the building shall be sloped 5% for a minimum of ten (10) feet measured perpendicular to the face of the wall. All diverted water is to be directed to an approved drainage. Alternative grading methods can be found in C.B.C. Section 1804.3.

6.1.8 The above referenced site drainage conditions should be maintained over the course of the life of the structure. Proper long term performance of the foundation and building pad may be compromised if the surrounding site drainage and grading is adversely modified.

6.1.9 Plans and specifications should be provided to Beacon Geotechnical, Inc. prior to grading. Plans should include the grading plans, and foundation details. Structural loads should be shown on the foundation plans.

F-100853 September 9, 2013

6

6.1.10 It is recommended that Beacon Geotechnical, Inc. be retained to provide intermittent geotechnical engineering services during site development, grading and foundation construction phases of the work to observe compliance with the design concepts, specifications and recommendations, and to allow design changes in the event that subsurface conditions differ from those anticipated prior to the start of construction.

6.1.11 Should soils become unstable during grading due to excessive subsurface moisture, alternatives to correct instability may include aeration or the use of gravels and/or geotextiles as stabilizing measures. Recommendations for stabilization should be provided by this firm as needed during construction.

6.1.12 All water associated with drainage and runoff should not be discharged onto slope faces. All outflow of drainage structures and drainage facilities should be designed by the project Civil Engineer to minimize erosion.

6.2 Specific Site Development, Grading Pads, and Foundation Excavations

6.2.1 Due to the presence of low density soils and a cut/fill situation at the proposed bearing depth, overexcavation and recompaction of soils in the building area (including covered deck areas) will be necessary to decrease the potential for differential settlement and to provide more uniform bearing conditions. Soils should be overexcavated to a depth of two (2) feet below the bottom of footings, three (3) feet below existing grade, or 75% of the deepest fill thickness, whichever is greater. The over-excavation should extend to a distance of five (5) feet beyond the building perimeter. The resulting surface should be scarified to a depth of one (1) foot, moisture conditioned and recompacted to a minimum of 90% of maximum dry density. The intent of these recommendations is to provide a minimum of two (2) feet of compacted soils below the bottom of all footings, and recompact the loose topsoil.

6.2.2 Alternatively, the footings may be excavated to bear a minimum of one (1) foot into the underlying light brown A2 soil material encountered at a depth of four (4) feet below existing grade in our borings. To achieve uniform bearing conditions, the footings will likely need to be deepened in areas. A representative of this firm should be notified to monitor footing excavations. Prior to excavating footings, the slab areas should be overexcavated to a depth of one (1) foot below existing or finish grade whichever is deeper. The resulting surface should be scarified an additional one (1) foot, moisture conditioned and recompacted to a minimum of 90% of maximum dry density.

F-100853 September 9, 2013

7

6.2.3 Any excavated material from foundation and septic or drainage systems should be properly recompacted in accordance with all the recommendations for engineered fill. Alternatively, excavated soil may be hauled off site when adequate placement area is not available at the project location.

6.2.4 Areas outside the building area to receive fill, exterior slabs-on-grade, sidewalks and paving should be overexcavated to a depth of one (1) foot. The exposed surface should be scarified, moisture conditioned and recompacted.

6.2.5 On-site soils may be used for fill once they are cleaned of all organic material, rock, debris and irreducible material larger than eight (8) inches.

6.2.6 Although not encountered in our borings, should any trash, debris or subsurface structures be encountered during grading, removals will be necessary to adequate depths and horizontal limits as recommended by this firm at the time of grading.

6.2.7 Grading inspections shall be performed in accordance with the 2010 CBC Tables 1704.7. See Appendix B for project specific grading observation requirements.

6.3 Slope Construction

6.3.1 All hillside grading and construction of fill slopes should conform to the minimum standards listed in Chapter 18 of the California Building Code. It is recommended that a representative of this firm review the grading plans prior to grading and site development.

6.3.2 Fill slopes should be keyed and benched into firm natural ground when the existing slope to receive fill is 10:1, horizontal to vertical, or steeper. The keys should be tilted into the slope, should be a minimum of one equipment width wide, and should extend a minimum of three (3) feet deep at the outside edge.

6.3.3 Fill slopes should be overfilled, compacted and cut back to planned configurations. This will yield better compaction on the slope faces than other methods.

6.3.4 Lined drainage swales and down drains should be provided at the tops of all cut and fill slopes to divert drainage away from the slope faces.

6.3.5 Cut and fill slopes should not be constructed steeper than 2:1 (horizontal to vertical). Setbacks of structures from slopes should be maintained as per the C.B.C.

F-100853 September 9, 2013

8

6.4 Utility Trenches

6.4.1 Utility trench backfill should be governed by the provisions of this report relating to minimum compaction standards. In general, service lines inside of the property lines may be backfilled with native soils and compacted to a minimum of 90% of maximum dry density. Backfill of offsite service lines will be subject to the specifications of the jurisdictional agency or this report, whichever is more stringent.

6.4.2 A representative of this firm is to monitor compliance with these recommendations.

6.5 Structural Design – Foundations

6.5.1 Conventional or deepened continuous footings may be used for support of the structure.

6.5.2 Footings should bear entirely into firm recompacted or firm A2 native soils but not a combination of both.

6.5.3 Although deeper footing depths may be used for the purpose of the structural design, based on the project soil conditions, it is assumed that the footings will extend a minimum of eighteen (18) inches below lowest adjacent grade.

6.5.4 Continuous footings may be designed based on an allowable bearing value of 1750 psf.

6.5.5 Allowable bearing values are net (weight of footing and soils surcharge may be neglected) and are applicable for dead plus reasonable live loads.

6.5.6 Bearing values may be increased by one-third when transient loads such as wind and/or seismicity are incorporated into designs using the alternate load combinations in 2010 CBC Section 1605.3.2.

6.5.7 Lateral loads may be resisted by soils friction on floor slabs and foundations and by passive resistance of the soils acting on foundation stem walls. Lateral capacity is based on the assumption that any required backfill adjacent to foundations and grade beams is properly compacted.

6.5.8 For structures to be constructed above slopes, the outside faces at the bottom of footings should provide a minimum horizontal distance of ten (10) feet from the slope face.

6.5.9 Conventional continuous footings for buildings where the ground surface slopes at 10:1, horizontal to vertical, or steeper should be stepped so that both top and bottom are level.

6.5.10 Reinforcement of footings bottomed in soils in the “Very Low” expansion range should be designed by the Project Structural Engineer to properly resist the effects of the expansive soil. Additionally, soils should be lightly moistened immediately prior to pouring concrete.

F-100853 September 9, 2013

9

6.5.11 Foundation excavations should be observed by a representative of Beacon Geotechnical, Inc. after excavation, but prior to placing reinforcing steel or forms.

6.6 Slabs on Grade

6.6.1 Concrete slabs should be supported by compacted structural fill as recommended earlier in this report.

6.6.2 It is recommended that perimeter slabs (walks, patios, etc.) be designed relatively independent of footing stems (i.e. free floating) so foundation adjustment will be less likely to cause cracking.

6.6.3 Slabs should be underlain with a minimum of four (4) inches of clean and free draining sand. Areas where floor wetness would be undesirable should be underlain with a 10mil moisture barrier to reduce moisture transmission from the subgrade soils to the slab. The membrane should be placed at mid-height in the clean sand.

6.6.4 Reinforcement and slab thickness should be determined by the Project Structural Engineer.

6.6.5 Soils underlying slabs in the “Very Low” expansion range, as a minimum, should be lightly moistened prior to placement of concrete.

6.7 Structural Design – Lateral Resistance Parameters

6.7.1 Resistance to lateral loading may be provided by friction acting on the base of foundations. A coefficient of friction of 0.35 may be applied to dead load forces. This value does not include a factor of safety.

6.7.2 Passive resistance acting on the sides of foundation stems equal to 275 pcf of equivalent fluid weight may be included for resistance to lateral load. This value does not include a factor of safety. However, when passive resistance is used in conjunction with friction, the less significant resistance term should be reduced by one-third in determining the total lateral resistance.

6.7.3 A one-third increase in the quoted passive value may be used when considering transient loads such as wind and seismicity.

6.8 Structural Design – Settlement Considerations

6.8.1 Maximum expected settlements approximately 3/4 inches are anticipated for foundations and floor slabs designed as recommended.

6.8.2 Differential settlement between adjacent load bearing members should be less than one-half the total settlement.

6.8.3 The majority of settlement should occur during construction. Post construction settlement should be minimal.

F-100853 September 9, 2013

10

6.9 Structural Design – Retaining Walls

6.9.1 Conventional cantilever retaining walls bearing in soils prepared in accordance with the “Grading Pads – Site Development and Foundation Excavations” section of this report and backfilled with compacted soils may be designed for the lateral pressures listed below:

Active Case 35 pcf At Rest Case 55 pcf Passive Case 275 pcf Max. Toe Pressure 1750 psf Coefficient of Sliding Friction 0.35

6.9.2 Basement and structural retaining walls may be designed based on a peak ground acceleration (PGA) of 0.44 in accordance with the 2010 CBC Section 1803.5.12. For Seismic Design Category D, E or F, the peak ground acceleration value should be incorporated into the design of basement and structural retaining walls and has been taken as SDS/2.5.

6.9.3 In addition to the static soil pressures described above, it is important to note that the active pressure condition will only fully develop if the retaining wall structure is allowed to move a sufficient distance. The necessary lateral movements required to establish the active pressure condition are shown below,

Non-Expansive Granular Soil 0.001H – 0.004H Expansive Cohesive Soil 0.01H – 0.04H

where H represents the height of the wall. At-rest pressures should be used for design purposes where retaining wall systems connected or adjacent to building structures would be adversely affected by the above referenced lateral displacements. Design pressures noted above are applicable to a horizontally retained surface behind the wall. Walls having a retained surface that slopes upward from the wall should be designed for an additional equivalent fluid pressure of 1 pcf for the active case and 1.5 pcf for the at-rest case, for every two degrees of slope inclination. Walls positioned on or near descending slopes should be evaluated by this firm on an individual basis.

6.9.4 Retaining wall conditions greater than ten (10) feet in height requiring additional seismic design load values should be reviewed by this firm prior to establishing the appropriate seismic design parameters.

6.9.5 The pressures listed above were based on the assumption that backfilled soils will be compacted to 90% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557 Test Method.

F-100853 September 9, 2013

11

6.9.6 The lateral earth pressure to be resisted by the retaining walls or similar structures should include the loads from any structures or temporary loads that influence the wall design.

6.9.7 A back drain or an equivalent system of backfill drainage should be incorporated into the retaining wall design. Backfill immediately behind the retaining structure should be a free-draining granular material. Alternatively, the back of the wall could be lined with a geodrain system.

6.9.8 Compaction on the uphill side of the wall within a horizontal distance equal to one wall height should be performed by hand-operated or other lightweight compaction equipment. This is intended to reduce potential “locked-in” lateral pressures caused by compaction with heavy grading equipment.

6.9.9 Water should not be allowed to pond near the top of the wall. To accomplish this, the final backfill site grade should be such that all water is diverted away from the retaining wall.

7 REFERENCES CITED

USGS, Online, Geologic Hazards Science Center, United States Geological Society, in Cooperation with California Geological Society (CGS), www.geohazards.usgs.gov/qfaults/ca/California.php

8 ADDITIONAL SERVICES

This report is based on the assumption that an adequate program of monitoring and testing will be performed by Beacon Geotechnical, Inc. during construction to check compliance with the recommendations given in this report. The recommended tests and observations include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:

8.1 Review of the building and grading plans during the design phase of the project.

8.2 Observation and testing during site preparation, grading, placing of engineered fill, and foundation construction.

8.3 Consultation as required during construction.

9 PROJECT LIMITATIONS AND UNIFORMITY OF CONDITIONS

9.1 The analysis and recommendations submitted in this report are based in part upon the data obtained from the borings drilled on site. The nature and extent of variations between and beyond the borings may not become evident until construction. If variations then appear evident, it may be necessary to re-evaluate the recommendations of this report.

F-100853 September 9, 2013

12

9.2 The scope of our services did not include environmental assessment or geological study. The scope of services did not include investigation for the presence or absence of wetlands, hazardous or toxic materials in the soil, surface water, groundwater or air. Any statements in this report or on the soil boring logs regarding odors, unusual or suspicious items or conditions observed are strictly for the information of the client.

9.3 Findings of this report are valid as of this date, however, changes in a condition of a property can occur with passage of time whether they be due to natural processes or works of man on this or adjacent properties. In addition, changes in applicable or appropriate standard may occur whether they result from legislation or broadening knowledge. Accordingly, findings of this report may be invalidated wholly or partially by changes outside our control. Therefore, this report is subject to review and should not be relied upon after a period of one (1) year.

9.4 In the event that any changes in the nature, design, or location of the structure and other improvements are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and conclusions of this report modified or verified in writing.

9.5 This report is issued with the understanding that it is the responsibility of the owner or his representatives to insure the information and recommendations offered herein are called to the attention of the project architect and engineers. It is also the responsibility of the owner or his representatives to insure the information and recommendations offered herein are incorporated into the project plans and specifications and the necessary steps are taken to see that the contractor and subcontractors carry out such recommendations in the field.

9.6 Beacon Geotechnical, Inc. has prepared this report for the exclusive use of the client and authorized agents. This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices. No other warranties, either expressed or implied, are made as to the professional advice provided under the terms of this agreement.

9.7 It is recommended that Beacon Geotechnical, Inc. be provided the opportunity for a general review of final design and specifications in order that earthwork and foundation recommendations may be properly interpreted and implemented in the design and specifications. If Beacon Geotechnical, Inc. is not accorded the privilege of making this recommended review, we can assume no responsibility for misinterpretation of our recommendations.

END OF TEXT Appendices

APPENDIX A

Vicinity Map

Site Plan

Quaternary Fault Map

Investigation Parameters

Unified Soil Classification Table

Boring Logs

PROJECT #: F-100853

SITE

PROJECT #: F-100853

1

2

PROJECT #: F-100853 QUATERNARY FAULT MAP

Map Showing Nearby Quaternary Aged Faults (USGS, Online)

SITE

INVESTIGATION PARAMETERS

• The borings were drilled to a maximum depth of fifteen (15) feet below the existing ground surface to observe the soil profile and to obtain samples for laboratory analysis. The borings were drilled on September 2, 2013 using a mobile drill rig and/or hand auguring equipment. The approximate locations of the borings were determined in the field by pacing and sighting, and are shown on the Site Plan in this Appendix.

• Blow counts were obtained within the test borings with Undisturbed Ring

Sampler hand sampling equipment. The blow counts were obtained by dropping the sampler with a 10 pound hammer dropping eighteen (18) inches in accordance with ASTM D 3550.

• Bulk samples of the soils encountered were gathered from the auger

cuttings.

• The final logs of borings represent our interpretation of the contents of the field logs and the results of laboratory testing performed on the samples obtained during the subsurface investigation. The final logs are included in this Appendix.

UNITED SOIL CLASSIFICATION (ASTM D-2487)

UNITED SOIL CLASSIFICATION CHART F-100853

~!.TSANDI1A"t.3

!J!Q1J[t:)i I.!J\IJJi<"il:}

Sill. TSAND OJ.A'm

UWII)~

\'llilllf~

l~It~

~A~

~

·~~

aJ:a'ilN ~t"~.t'cl;ll[t.\$ f{~%1"~.\II~

l:m~,~~!fiH IRJN~

~1~4;P1r4S

CLEAN SIOO)S <ft.ANES

~M'IDF!HU >U~~

~f!TIAAI\ON m=Sh\MCII: ~M~!U!P!J

MiNllli'l.Wi" ®r.fi.~

'lll~'l· !ml'il' ,.w ~

to- ' ~

~-<iii ~JW

~~ \!iii«tlllll'l" R\!11

!i'~>a:r'

~-1•4 4•1!

1!1•1.'!1 1lil•<'IIJ

Wfi:ll

• ~Of'~IWMI~~~filli!OOl.'tmN~IIl!IKII6CJ!II.l'Jfi ~ni!l).)mwl'~~~ilmW!mGW~~~~

~~-~

BEACON GEOTECHNICAL, INC.

CH FAT ClAY

~i!Mi

~r~mli!l'~

G• w

"' •il'lm ~-1&

1~-u

L~-u

QOU

LOG OF BORING for:

Site Location: City of Carmel by the Sea Scenic Road F-100853 Driller/Helper: Rig Type: Hard Auger BORING NO. 1 Auger Diameter: 4” Date: September 2, 2013

GROUNDWATER SAMPLE TYPE Time Depth SPT=Standard Penetration Test (uncorrected value, N/corrected value, N)

Depth (ft.)

Blow Type

Blows per ft.

Drilling comments

Voids Moisture Description USCS Beacon Soil ID

0 Loose Brown Silty Sand SM A1

6 -3%

9 -2%

Med Dense Light Brown Silty Sand SM A2

5 23 -2%

10 28 -1% Brown Silty Sand SM A3

15 Total Depth @ 15.0’

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

LOG OF BORING for:

Site Location: City of Carmel by the Sea Scenic Road F-100853 Driller/Helper: Rig Type: Hard Auger BORING NO. 2 Auger Diameter: 4” Date: September 2, 2013

GROUNDWATER SAMPLE TYPE Time Depth SPT=Standard Penetration Test (uncorrected value, N/corrected value, N)

Depth (ft.)

Blow Type

Blows per ft.

Drilling comments

Voids Moisture Description USCS Beacon Soil ID

0 Loose Brown Silty Sand SM A1

10 -2%

Med Dense Light Brown Silty Sand SM A2

5

Total Depth @ 6.0’

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

APPENDIX B

Laboratory Testing Parameters

Laboratory Results

Bench & Keyway Detail

Transition Lot Detail

Deepened Footing Detail

2010 CBC -- Table 1704.7

LABORATORY PARAMETERS

• Samples were reviewed along with field logs to determine which would be analyzed further. Those chosen for laboratory analysis were considered representative of soils that would be exposed and/or used during grading, and those deemed to be within the influence of the proposed structure. Test results are presented in this Appendix.

• ASTM D2487-11 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering

Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

• ASTM D1557-12 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

• ASTM D2216-10 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass

• ASTM D4829-11 Standard Test Method for Expansion Index of Soils

LABORATORY RESULTS Boring Max. Opt. Depth USCS Density Moisture E.I.

(pcf) (%)

Material A1 1@0’-4’ SM 112.6 11.3 0

Material A2 1@5’-10’ SM 115.1 11.0 0

Material A3 1@11’-15’ SM 113.8 10.9 0

PROJECT #: F-100853

BENCH AND KEYWAY DETAIL (Typical)

NOT TO SCALE

Addi l io~al bench back drains

Maxi~~m Slope; 2:1

Remove a'l existir.g soil

Exisllng slopo - - --.._

Tee of Slope

Keyway back drain

BENCH AND KEYWAY DETAIL BEACON GEOTECHNICAL, INC.

PROJECT #: F-100853

GENERAL GRADING RECOMMENDATIONS

CUT LOT

------------------- ,.-

TOPSOIL, COLLUVIUM AND ----WEATHERED BEDROCK .---

.-.--..------------- OVEREXCAVATE AND

REGRADE UNWEATH<=RED BEDROCK

CUT/FILL LOT (TRANSITION)

-----------------COMPACTED FILL ---------------TOPSOI L,

COLLUVIUM AND - UNWEATHERED BEDROCK WEATHERED .-.-BEDROCK..---

--3'

OVEREXCAVATE ANC REGRADE

TRANSITION LOT DETAIL BEACON GEOTECHNICAL, INC.

PROJECT #: F-100853



Crystalline Waterproofing Additive

03 05 16 - 1

SECTION 03 05 16 - CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING ADDITIVE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of cementitious crystalline waterproofing additive (admixture)

system as noted, completed with related accessories.


A. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete.

B. ASTM International

1. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens.

2. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete.

3. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing,

or Special Inspection.

C. NSF International:

1. NSF Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components.

D. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers

1. CRD-C48 - Handbook for Concrete and Cement Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of

Concrete.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Cementitious Crystalline Additive (Admixture): Mix of Portland cement, fine treated silica sand and active

proprietary chemicals which when mixed with fresh concrete causes a catalytic reaction which generates a

non-soluble crystalline formation of dendritic fibers within the pores and capillary tracts of concrete. This

process shall cause concrete to become permanently sealed against the penetration of water or liquids and

shall protect the concrete from deterioration due to harsh environmental conditions.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORAMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Testing Requirements: Crystalline waterproofing system shall be tested in accordance with the following

standards and conditions, and the testing results shall meet or exceed the performance requirements as

specified herein

B. Independent Laboratory: Testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory meeting the

requirements of ASTM E329 and certified by the United States Bureau of Standards. Testing laboratory

shall obtain all concrete samples and waterproofing product samples

C. Crystalline Formation: Crystallizing capability of waterproofing system shall be evidenced by independent

SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope) photographs showing crystalline formations within the concrete

matrix.

D. Permeability: Independent testing shall be performed according to CRD-C4. Treated concrete samples shall

be pressure tested to 150 psi (350 foot head of water) or 1.05 MPa (106 m head of water). The treated

samples shall exhibit no measurable leakage




03 05 16 - 2

E. Chemical Resistance: Independent testing shall be performed to determine "Sulfuric Acid Resistance of

Concrete Specimens". Treated concrete samples (dosage rates of 3, 5 and 7 percent) shall be tested against

untreated control samples. All samples shall be immersed in sulfuric acid and weighed daily until a control

sample reaches a weight loss of 50 percent or over. On final weighing the percentage weight loss of the

treated samples shall test significantly lower than the control samples.

F. Compressive Strength: Independent testing shall be performed according to ASTM C39. Concrete samples

containing the crystalline waterproofing additive shall be tested against untreated control sample. At 28

days, the treated samples shall exhibit a minimum of 10 percent increase in compressive strength over the

control sample.

G. Potable Water Approval: Independent testing shall be performed according to NSF Standard 61, and

approval for use of waterproofing material on structures holding potable water shall be evidenced by NSF

certification


A. Coordination: Coordinate Work of this section with adjoining construction.

B. Required Conferences:

1. Contractor-Applicator-Manufacturer Review: Contractor and his applicator shall review Architect’s

drawings and specifications with agent of crystalline waterproofing additive manufacturer and obtain

their agreement that selected systems are proper, compatible, and adequate for application shown and

that conditions and details do not conflict with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Preinstallation Meeting:

a. Contractor shall arrange conference to review crystalline waterproofing additive work after

review of submittals and prior to delivering cast-in-place concrete to site.

b. Conference to be attended by Architect, Owner’s representative, Contractor, and

Contractor’s applicator, agents of accepted manufacturers, and other installers whose work

may be affected by quality of waterproofing.

c. Participants shall have had at least one week’s advance notice of meeting date and time.

d. The meeting shall be held at the job site or other location as approved by Architect.

e. The following major considerations shall be reviewed at the conference:

1) Review in detail the Contract specifications, surface preparation, protection of adjacent

surfaces, installation procedures, field quality control, and other related items.

2) Review in detail job conditions, schedule, construction sequence, application

requirements, and quality of completed installation.

3) Review in detail the means of protecting completed work during remainder of

construction period.

4) Record discussions of conference and any conflict, incompatibility, or inadequacy, and

furnish a copy of record to each participant.

f. [Contractor] shall produce meeting notes that record discussions of conference and any

conflict, incompatibility, or inadequacy and they will indicate that the applicator of

waterproofing has reviewed and accepted the substrates for waterproofing.

g. Distribute meeting notes to all attendees prior to installation of cast-in-place concrete with

crystalline waterproofing additive c.

C. Scheduling: Coordinate with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.





03 05 16 - 3

C. Test Reports: Submit, for acceptance, complete test reports from approved independent testing

laboratories certifying that waterproofing system conforms to performance characteristics and testing

requirements specified herein.

D. Manufacturer’s Certification: Provide certificate signed by manufacturer or manufacturer's representative

certifying that the materials to be installed comply in all respects with the requirements of this specification.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturers shall have no less than 10 years experience in manufacturing

the crystalline waterproofing additive for the required work. Manufacturer must be capable of providing

field service representation during construction phase. Manufacturer’s that cannot supply the performance

test data specified herein will not be considered for use on this project.

B. Applicator: Installer of crystalline waterproofing additive shall be approved by themanufacturer or

manufacturer's representative in writing.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store packaged material in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of

use. Each container shall be identified with material name, date of manufacture and lot number.

B. Store material in dry, well-ventilated space, off the ground.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS

A. Cementitious Crystalline Waterproofing Additive:

1. Description: Dry powder compound consisting of Portland cement, very fine treated silica sand and

various active proprietary chemical.

2. Product: Xypex Chemical Corp.’s “Xypex Concentrate Admix C-500”; or approved equal.

2.2 MIXES

A. Mix waterproofing with concrete at rate of 2 – 3 percent by weight of concrete.

B. Additive must be added to concrete at time of batching. It is recommended that the admixture be added first to

coarse and fine aggregate and blended thoroughly for 2-3 minutes before adding cement and water. Do not add

admixture directly to wet concrete. Consult with the admixture manufacturer for methods of admixture at

ready mix plants.

C. Blend concrete mix using normal practices to ensure formation of homogeneous mixture.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONCRETE PLACEMENT WITH ADMIXTURE

A. Place concrete in accordance with requirements of Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Moist cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1. Curing compounds may be used in the event that project

requirements or conditions prevent moist curing. Curing compounds shall comply with ASTM C309.




03 05 16 - 4

C. Normal backfilling procedures may be used after concrete ha s cured for at least seven days.

D. Not all concrete is required to include waterproofing admixture. The following locations are required to include

the admixture:

1. Cast-in-place concrete walls surrounding the bathroom facility.

2. Cast-in-place concrete roof.




Concrete Accessories

03 15 00 - 1

SECTION 03 15 00 – CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section supplements requirements of Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete and includes:

1. Floor sealers.

2. Color pigments.

3. Waterstops.


A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product specified.

B. Samples: Only as requested.:


A. Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Comply with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

B. Reinforcement: Comply with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete for steel reinforcement and other

requirements for reinforcement accessories.

2.2 FLOOR SEALERS

A. Penetrating Floor Sealer (CONC-1):

1. Description: Chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials

and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete

surfaces.

2. Manufactures:

a. Ashford Formula; Curecrete Chemical Co., Inc.

b. Seal Hard; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

c. Day-Chem Sure Hard; Dayton Superior Corporation.

d. Euco Diamond Hard; Euclid Chemical Co.

e. Or equal.



Concrete Accessories

03 15 00 - 2

2.3 COLOR PIGMENT

A. Color Pigment:

1. Description: ASTM C979/C979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing

admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

2. Products:

a. Scofield CHROMIX® Admixture.

b. Davis ColorsTM Mix-Ready.

c. Solomon Colors.

d. Or equal.

3. Colors:

a. Color Pigment 1: Match Davis Colors #61078 “Padre Brown” at walls.

b. Color Pigment 1: Match Davis Colors #5447 “Mesa Buff” at roof.

2.4 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Waterstops:

1. Description: Sodium bentonite or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete. :

2. Products:

a. Below Grade Locations: Colloid Environmental Technologie’ Co. "Volclay Waterstop-

RX"; or equal.

b. Above Grade Locations: Mitsubishi International Corporation ‘s "Adeka Ultra Seal P-

201"; or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FLOOR SEALERS

A. General: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Penetrating Floor Sealer (CONC-1):

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete

surface repairs.

2. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; re-wet; and repeat

brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a

second coat in a similar manner.

3.2 WATERSTOPS

A. Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest

lengths practicable.




Cast-In-Place Concrete

03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design,

placement procedures, and finishes.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Architectural Concrete: Formed Concrete elements which are exposed to view as an exterior surface in the

completed structure.


A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window:

1. AAMA 810.1 – Type I (Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes).

B. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 117 - Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.

3. ACI 302.1 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.

4. ACI 303.1 - Standard Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete.

5. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A775/775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars.

2. ASTM A484 - Standard Specification for Low Carbon Magnetic Iron..

3. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Field.

4. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

5. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens.

6. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

7. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

8. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

9. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete

10. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

11. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

12. ASTM E1155 – Standard Specification for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness

Numbers

13. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with

Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.

14. ASTM E1643 – Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water

Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

D. U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology:

1. DOC PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix indicated.




03 30 00 - 2

C. Samples: For each of the following materials:

1. Form liners – board formed concrete.

D. Shop Drawings: Include details of steel reinforcement placement, including material, grade, bar schedules,

stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports. Also include locations of embedded items

on shop drawings.

E. Material certificates.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products

complying with ASTM C94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless modified by

the requirements of the contract documents.

1. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and

protection of in-place concrete.

2. Formwork and form accessories.

3. Steel reinforcement and supports.

4. Concrete mixtures.

5. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete.

C. Mockups: Before casting vertical board formed concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under

sample submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of

workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the

completed Work:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.

2. Build mockups of typical exterior wall of cast-in-place board formed concrete as shown on

Drawings.

3. Demonstrate curing, cleaning, and protecting of cast-in-place form liner concrete, finishes, and

contraction joints, as applicable.

4. In presence of Architect, damage part of the exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and

texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair of surface blemishes to

match adjacent undamaged surfaces.

5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before casting board formed concrete.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Form-Facing Materials:

1. General: For formwork and other form-facing material requirements. Use materials which will

provide a true and even surface. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints

and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form material of sufficient thickness

to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection.

2. Form-Facing Panels for As-Cast Concrete Finishes: Exterior-grade panels, nonabsorptive, that

will provide continuous, true, and smooth architectural concrete surfaces, one of the following:

a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge sealed,

complying with DOC PS 1.

b. Finnish phenolic overlaid birch plywood.

3. Plank and Board Lumber (Vertical Board Formed):

a. No. 2 or better Hem-Fir, as indicated on Drawings.




03 30 00 - 3

4. Form-Facing Panel Edge Sealer: Nox-Crete "Edge Flex"; or equal.

5. Chamfer Strips: Rigid plastic, elastomeric rubber, or dressed wood, nonstaining, fabricate to the

shapes indicated.

6. Form Joint Tape: Compressible foam tape, pressure sensitive, AAMA 810.1, minimum 1/4 inch

thick.

7. Form Joint Sealant: Elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type M or S, Grade NS,

that adheres to form joint substrates.

8. Sealer: Penetrating, clear, polyurethane wood form sealer formulated to reduce absorption of

bleed water and prevent migration from wood of set-retarding chemicals.

a. Provide Nox-Crete’s "Clear Pre-Form"; or equal.

9. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain,

or adversely affect architectural concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of

those surfaces.

a. Provide Nox-Crete "Form Coating 250 or E"; or equal.

10. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms

and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

a. Form Ties: Snap-off metal; cone ends.

b. Furnish ties with tapered tie cone spreaders that, when removed, will leave holes not

larger than 1 inch in diameter on concrete surface.

B. Steel Reinforcement

1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A775/A775M, Grade 60, deformed.

2. Plain Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A884, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat

sheets.

C. Concrete Materials

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II.

2. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 1 1/2-inch nominal

size. Combined Aggregate gradation of 3/8 inch maximum (pea gravel) shall not be used.

3. Water: Complying with ASTM C94/C94M.

D. Admixtures

1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.

2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.

3. High Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.

4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type E.

5. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D.

E. Curing Compound: The Cure by Sinak Corporation; conform to ASTM C309; Zero VOC

F. Underslab Vapor Retarder:

1. Description: ASTM E1745, Class A; minimum 10 mil coextruded polyolefin.

2. Products: WR Meadows, Inc.’s “Perminator 10 Mil”; Raven Industries’ "Vapor Block 10"

Fortifiber Building systems Group’s “Moistop Ultra 10"; Reef Industries, Inc.’s "Griffolyn 10 Mil

Green"; Stego Industries LLCF’s ’ "Stego Wrap Class A Vapor retarder”; or equal.

G. Accessory Products:

1. Provide manufacturer's recommended self-adhesive plastic seam tape for seams and penetrations.

2. Penetration boots: Provide manufacturer's recommended accessory system for sealing pipe and

conduit penetrations.

2.2 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.

B. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, for normal weight concrete determined by either

laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:




03 30 00 - 4

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi.

2. Slump: Shall not exceed 3 inches plus or minus 1 inch for footings, slabs on grade and mass

concrete; and 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch for other concrete. Slump limitations noted shall apply

to concrete mixes prior to the addition of any water-reducing admixtures or super-plasticizers.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement

having an air content of 5.0 percent within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent for concrete exposed to

weather.

1. Air content of trowel-finished interior concrete floors shall not exceed 3.0 percent.

D. Concrete at slabs on grade shall have a maximum water/cement ration of 0.47.

E. Admixtures: Architectural concrete and concrete with a required water/cement ratio of 0.47 or lower shall

contain a high range water reducing admixture.

2.3 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2

hours to 75 minutes. When air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery

time to 60 minutes.

B. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the work, indicating project identification name

and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location

of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect existing conditions and the installed work of other trades and verify

that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the

Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes

acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable

conditions.

3.2 FORMWORK ERECTION

A. In addition to ACI 303.1 limits on form-facing panel deflection, limit concrete surface irregularities,

designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch.

B. Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding with formwork. Align form joints.

C. Use plywood forms, unless other systems are approved by Architect.

D. Coordinate with work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves,

bolts, anchors, and other inserts.

E. Architectural Concrete Forms:

1. Construct forms of high density overlay plywood.

2. Use fiberglass form ties at an even spacing as approved by the Architect.




03 30 00 - 5

3. Additional Tolerance Requirements: In accordance with the additional requirements of ACI 301.

Form surfaces at the joints between each panel shall be flush within a tolerance of plus or minus

1/16 inch.

4. Form Joint Seal for "Architectural" Concrete: Apply double face tape, not more than 1/16th inch

thick to edges of form panels holding back from form surface at least 1/16 inch; apply continuous

bead of silicone sealant for the length of the joint; tool sealant smooth and flush with adjoining

contact surfaces. Wipe off all excess sealant. Fill flush all holes and imperfections in forming

surface with sealant.

5. Rustication Strips: Glue or nail to form surfaces; set and fill nail holes; seal to surface of forms.

F. Vertical Board Formed Walls:

1. Place wood form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated.

2. Provide solid backing and attach securely to prevent deflection and maintain stability of liners

during concreting.

3. Use fiberglass form ties at an even spacing as approved by the Architect.

4. Seal joints of form liners and form liner accessories to prevent mortar leaks.

5. Construct forma to permit placing of concrete in one vertical pour.

6. Very lightly sand blast forms to remove splinters.

7. No fins permitted between boards.

G. Seal form joints and penetrations at form ties with form joint tape or form joint sealant to prevent mortar

leaks.

H. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions,

before placing reinforcement. Verify that form coatings will not affect the bond of subsequent concrete

surface treatments.

I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of cast-in-place concrete.

J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain

proper alignment.

K. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117, unless specified otherwise.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Prepare subgrade prior to placing concrete in accordance with requirements of the Geotechnical

Engineering Report, see Section 02 32 00 - Geotechnical Investigation.

B. Underslab Vapor Retarder:

1. Install Underslab vapor retarder in accordance with requirements of the Geotechnical Engineering

Report, see Section 02 32 00 - Geotechnical Investigation.

2. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's

written instructions under all interior slabs-on-grade.

3. Lap and seal all seams a minimum of 6 inches, seal around all penetrations, lap and seal against

foundation walls and footings with manufacturer’s recommended sealing tape or mastic.

C. Steel Reinforcement: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing

concrete.

D. Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

1. Construction Joints: Locate and install so as not to impair strength or appearance of concrete at

locations indicated or as approved by Architect.




03 30 00 - 6

2. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one

fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:




03 30 00 - 7

a. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting

action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops

random contraction cracks.

E. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials."

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery at the project site or during placement.

C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.

3.5 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Vertical Board Formed Finish: Produce a textured surface matching approve mockup and free of pockets,

streaks, honeycombs, and of uniform appearance, color, and texture.

B. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and

defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4-inch in height rubbed

down or chipped off.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

C. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly

and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas.

Completely remove fins and other projections.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering

material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, damp-proofing, or painting.

2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.

3. Grout tie holes solid and flush with color matched mortar.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces:

1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces,

strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.

2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces,

unless otherwise indicated.

E. Form Reuse:

1. Architect will approve reuse of forms provided they are straight, clean, free from nails, dirt, hardened

concrete, or other injurious matter and edges and surfaces are in good condition.

2. Clean and repair any damage caused by placing, removal, or storage. Reuse of formwork with

repairs or patches which would result in adverse effects to architectural concrete finish will not be

permitted.

3. Store formwork in manner to prevent damage or distortion.

4. Reseal as required to achieve concrete of specified quality.

3.6 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, re-straightening, and finishing operations for concrete

surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form

a uniform and open textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface.




03 30 00 - 8

1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to slab surfaces.

D. Tolerance: Provide Random Traffic floor tolerances as follows, when measured in accordance with ASTM

E1155, including those floors to receive subsequent finishes.

1. Slabs on Grade: FF 25, FL 20, over test area; FF 17, FL 15, minimum local value.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying, and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply

with ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot weather

protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions

occur before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least 7 days as follows:

1. Moisture-Retaining Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for

curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches,

and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing

period using cover material and waterproof tape.

2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according

to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours

after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a Qualified Independent Testing and Inspecting Agency to sample

materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests will be performed

according to ACI 301.

B. Continuous Field Inspection: The Independent Testing Agency shall be present at all times during the

placing of structural reinforced concrete. Work shall not proceed until all inspections are completed.

C. Prior to placing concrete, the Inspector shall inspect:

1. Accuracy, configuration, and cleanliness of all formwork 2. Quantity, cleanliness, and

placement of all reinforcing steel.

D. Concrete Sampling: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C172

shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5

cubic yards, but less than 25 cubic yards, plus one set for each additional 100 cubic yards or

fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: At least one composite sample for each 100 cubic yards (76 cubic meters) or

fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.

3. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four

standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

a. At the Contractor's expense and direction, cast and field-cure standard cylinder

specimens as may be required for the construction process. Number of specimens and

testing age shall be determined by the Contractor based on construction sequence

requirements.




03 30 00 - 9

4. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days

and two at 28 days.

a. Test field-cured specimens at the Contractor's direction.

b. Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days.

c. A compressive strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two

specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

E. Reinforcement Welding: All shop and field welds of reinforcing steel will be inspected. The Special

Welding Inspector will check the materials and equipment, the qualifications and ability of the welder, and

details of construction and procedure, as well as the welds themselves. The Inspector may use gamma ray,

magneflux, trepanning, ultrasonics, or any other aid to visual inspection which the Inspector may deem

necessary to determine the adequacy of the welding.

F. No concrete shall be placed until placement of reinforcement steel has been inspected and approved.

Provide 48 hours notice to the Inspector prior to placing concrete.




Anchored Stone Veneer

04 43 16 - 1

SECTION 04 43 16 - ANCHORTED STONE VENEER

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of anchored stone veneer assemblies and related items.


1. Provision of joint sealants.

2. Provision of sheet metal flashing and trim.



1. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

2. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.


4. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

5. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.

B. CBC - 2010 California Building Code.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design anchors and supports under direction of Professional Engineer, experienced in design of this work and

licensed in State of California.

B. Design anchors to resist loads as required by CBC.

C. Design anchor attachments to stone with factor of safety of 5:1.

D. Final design shall be based on specific physical property values for stone to be used. Obtain these values from

the stone supplier.

E. Use a minimum of four anchors per panel up to 12 square feet with two additional anchors for each additional

8 square feet.


A. Pre-Installation Meeting:

1. Contractor shall arrange meeting to be attended by Architect, Owner’s Representative, Contractor and

Contractor’s installer, and agents of manufacturers, all of whom shall have had at least one week’s

advance notice.

2. Convene meeting minimum seven days prior to commencing work of this Section.

3. Conference shall be held at the job site.

4. Requirements of related work, preparation, storage and handling, materials, specification

requirements, coordination with related or adjoining work, work sequence, items requiring backing

and support, and issues that might affect proper metal support assemblies shall be discussed.

Commented [C1]:




04 43 16 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples:

1. Stone: 24-inches-square; representative range each finish for preliminary review.

2. Other Samples only as requested.

B. Product Data: Stone and stone accessories.


A. Installer’s Qualifications: Company specializing in installing products specified in this Section with a minimum

of five years documented experience.

B. Mock-Up:

1. Construct a mock-up of anchor stone veneer for architect’s approval prior to commencement of job.

2. Location: As directed by Architect.

3. Size: Approximately 4 feet wide by 6 feet high.

4. Mock-up shall simulate actual design and execution conditions.

5. Allow Architect to view and obtain approval of mock-up before proceeding with any other

masonry installation.

6. Approved mock-up may remain as first in place construction.


A. Deliver stone to the site in accordance with schedule and in proper sequence with all necessary care in

handling, being maintained to avoid soiling or damaging.

B. Unload and store stone clear off the ground on non-staining raised platform protected from weather. Cover

stone with non-staining waterproof paper, clean canvas, or polyethylene.

C. Protect cementitious materials against exposure to moisture. Use of cementitious or other materials that have

become caked and hardened from absorption of moisture will not be permitted.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not place stone when temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit unless

Architect approves and Contractor provides means for preventing damage from freezing before and after

placement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stone: Golden Granite, 5 inches thick plus or minus 1 inch and 4 to 18 inches high foor main field for exterior

walls and 18 to 36 inch boulders per site plan.

B. Supplier: Graniterock, Seaside CA 93955 (831) 392-3701

C. Mortar:

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 Portland cement or ASTM C91 Type N masonry cement.

2. Aggregates for Mortar: ASTM C144.

3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

4. Mortar Coloring: Mineral oxide type, color as selected.

5. Water: Clean and potable, free from impurities detrimental to mortar and grout.




04 43 16 - 3

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Other Components:

1. Material: Stainless steel, ASTM A666.

2. Sizes and Configurations: As indicate on Drawings and as required for vertical and horizontal support

to stone and applicable loads.

3. Wire ties are not permitted,

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Provide any cutting and drilling as necessary to accommodate installation and other trades.

B. Patching or hiding of defects will not be permitted.

2.4 MIXES AND MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270,

Type N.

B. General Mixing Requirements:

1. Measure materials accurately. Shovel measurements will not be permitted.

2. Use mechanical mixer of at least one sack capacity.

3. Mix for minimum of three minutes and in no case less than time required for securing uniform mass.

4. Completely empty drum before charging succeeding batch of materials.

5. Exercise extreme care in measuring ingredients for partial batches.

6. Mortar shall not be retempered with the addition of water. Mixture shall be used before initial set has

taken place.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area to receive stone and verify that:

1. Conditions are free of defects that would adversely affect stone work.

2. Surface is firm, clean and all related work is complete and ready to receive stone work.

B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure stone units are clean and free from dirt or other foreign material. Do not use wire brushes or

implements that mark or damage exposed surfaces.

B. Protection:

1. Protect surrounding work as required against damage from stone work. Clean satisfactorily or

otherwise correct damage to surrounding work resulting from stone work.

2. At all times, walls shall be adequately protected from droppings.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Set stone accurately in accordance with the Contract Drawings and approved mockup.

B. Securely attach anchorage system to substrate as indicated on Drawings.




04 43 16 - 4

C. Locate anchorage system components as indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings.

D. Wet absorptive stones in preparation for placement to minimize moisture suction from mortar.

E. Select adjoining stones and place in manner to avoid extra wide and extra thin joints, or larger grouted voids

between stones.

F. Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone over bearing surface. Provide a tooled joint as

approved by Architect.

G. A stone, when placed in its intended position, shall remain at rest before mortar is applied around.

H. Provide approved method of weeps immediately above horizontal flashing, above shelf angles and supports at

bottom of walls.

I. Do not use any installation tools or methods that will mar exposed surfaces of stone.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completion of setting, all stone shall be thoroughly cleaned by scrubbing with fiber brushes and a mild

alkaline abrasive cleaner and clean water that contains no caustic or harsh fillers, or by the application of steam.

Upon completion, leave stone clean and free from mortar stains or traces of cleaning.

B. Upon completion of work, remove from site surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from this Work.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISH WORK

A. Protection of stone work during and subsequent to installation shall be the responsibility of the mason

contractor.

B. Whenever necessary, substantial wooden covering shall be placed to protect the stone work. Nonstaining

building paper or membrane shall be used under the wood. Maintain all covering until removed to permit final

clearing of the stone work.




Metal Fabrications

05 50 00 - 1

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of fabricated metal items, related accessories, and fasteners including

but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Miscellaneous steel shapes.

2. Stainless steel shelves in Toilet Rooms.

3. Galvanized insect screen between top of door and overhead concrete.

1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS


1. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products.

2. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

3. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon

Steel Plates.

4. ASTM A384/A384M- Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During

Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies.

5. ASTM A385/A385M - Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip).

6. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. The Society for Protective Coatings:

1. SSPC-SP1 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 1 Solvent Cleaning.

2. SSPC-SP2 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 2 Hand Tool Cleaning.

3. SSPC-SP6 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning.

4. SSPC-SP7 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate with other work supporting or adjoining miscellaneous metal and verify requirements for

cutting out, fitting, and attaching.

B. Scheduling:

1. Ensure timely fabrication of items to be embedded or enclosed by other work.

2. Furnish information and assistance required for locating embedded items and be responsible for

proper location.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

B. Shop Drawings: Show at large scale construction of various components including profiles, sizes, methods of

joining, connection attachments, thickness of metals, reinforcing, anchorage, size and types of fasteners, and

accessories.

C. Samples: Only as requested.



Metal Fabrications

05 50 00 - 2


A. Accept metal fabrications on site in labeled shipments. Inspect for damage.

B. Deliver, store, and handle packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until

time of use.

C. Discharge materials carefully and store on clean concrete surface or raised platform in safe, dry area. Do not

dump onto ground.

D. Protect metal fabrications from damage by exposure to weather or by ground contact.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL MATERIALS

A. Ferrous Metals:

1. Architectural and Miscellaneous Steel Items: ASTM A283/A283M.

2. Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90 zinc coating.

B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 302 or 304.

C. Copper Screen: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Plywood Backing at Stainless Shelves: Comply with requirements of Section 60 10 00 – rough Carpentry.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Factory Applied Primer: Tnemec Co., Inc.’s “Series 27WB Typoxy”; PPG Amercoat’s “Amerlock 2”; or

approved equal.

B. Galvanized Finish Touch-Up Coating:

1. Description: Liquid zinc compound that bonds electrochemically to iron, steel, or aluminum.

2. Product: Product: ZRC Worldwide’s “Galvilite”; Rust-Oleum Corp. “Zinc-Rich Cold Galvanizing

Compound”, Tnemec Co. Inc.’s “Tneme-Zinc 90-97”; or equal.

2.3 SPECIALLY FABRICATED PRODUCTS

A. Preparation:

1. Verify sizes, designs, and locations of items; do so at site whenever construction progress permits.

B. General Requirements:

1. Accurately fabricate decorative metal work to desired profile, design, and dimensions in accordance

with Contract Documents and reviewed Shop Drawings and finish Samples.

2. Fabricate items from materials noted and make true to profiles shown. Obtain Architect’s approval of

proposed variations.

3. Fabricate related components of same material as fabrication.

4. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

5. Miter corners and angles of frames and moldings unless otherwise noted.

6. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt

tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

7. Perform cutting, shearing, drilling, punching, threading, and tapping as required for items or their

adjacent work.

8. Drill or punch holes; do not use cutting torch.



Metal Fabrications

05 50 00 - 3

9. Ensure shearing and punching leaves true lines and surfaces.

10. Items to be Galvanized: Fabricate in accordance with recommended practices of ASTM

A385/A385M and A123/A123M unless otherwise noted.

11. Fabricate exterior items for assembly and installation on site without field-welding of joint.

12. Ensure metal thickness and assembly details provide ample strength and stiffness.

C. Anchorages and Fastenings

1. Fabricate anchors of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted

otherwise.

2. Provide fasteners and anchor assemblies required for complete fabrication, field assembly, and

erection.

3. Conceal fastenings wherever practicable.

4. Size internally threaded diameters to accommodate galvanized threaded bolts where galvanizing is

required.

2.4 FACTORY APPLIED FINISHES - STEEL

A. Preparation of Surfaces:

1. Thoroughly clean mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from ferrous metal prior to

galvanizing, hot phosphate treatment, or painting.

2. Where hand cleaning methods are not adequate, clean in accordance with SSPC-SP1, SSPC-SP2, or

SSPC-SP7 as required.

3. Completely eliminate burrs, rough spots, and pitting from normally exposed ferrous metal items.

B. Galvanizing:

1. Galvanize items after fabrication in largest sections practicable unless otherwise permitted or

recommended by ASTM A384/A384M.

2. Where galvanizing is removed by welding or other assembly procedures, clean area of any foreign

matter by wire brushing and/or metal conditioner recommended by galvanized finish touch-up

manufacturer. Apply galvanized touch-up coating by brush or spray with a minimum coverage of 1.5

mils, dry film.

3. Where ferrous metal item is noted to be galvanized, perform galvanizing in accordance with following

standards as applicable to item.

a. Fabricated Items: ASTM A123/A123M.

C. Painting:

1. Follow paint manufacturer’s directions.

2. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.

3. Permit thorough drying before shipment.

4. Spot paint abrasions and field connections after assembly.

D. Ferrous Metal Schedule:

1. Concealed: Clean and hot-dip galvanize in accordance with galvanizing standards.

2. Exposed: Clean, then hot-dip galvanize in accordance with galvanizing standards, chemically etch,

and shop apply one prime coat.

2.5 FACTORY APPLIED FINISHES - STAINLESS STEEL

A. Remove scratches, abrasions, dents, die markings, and other defects prior to finishing operations. Perform this

work in addition to finish treatment specified.

B. Typical Finish: No. 4 directional finish with grain running in long direction of item or piece.



Metal Fabrications

05 50 00 - 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive work and verify that:

1. Field conditions and dimensions are acceptable and are ready to receive items.

B. Do not start installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to

appropriate sections.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Install items plumb, true, rigid, and neatly trimmed out.

C. Make provisions for erection stresses and loads. Install temporary bracing to maintain alignment, until

permanent bracing and attachments are installed.

D. Do not tighten fastener through finish alone without spacer washers.

E. Provide concrete inserts or pre-drilled expansion anchors in anchoring items into concrete.

F. Field weld components indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings.

G. Protect dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with other materials causing corrosion.

H. Set items shown or required to be installed in sleeves with quick-setting anchor cement unless otherwise noted.

I. Obtain approval of Architect prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.

J. Field Touch-Up Painting: After erection, touch up welds, abrasions, and damaged finishes with prime paint

or galvanizing repair paint to match shop finishes.

K. Protect metal from damage to surface, profile, and shape.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove protective devices only when items will be safe from other construction operations or removal is

required to permit related work.

B. Clean prime coated items as required for finish painting.

C. After erection, thoroughly clean surfaces of foreign or deleterious matter such as dirt, mud, oil, or grease that

would impair bonding of fireproofing or concrete.




Rough Carpentry

06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of rough carpentry items including, but not necessarily limited to, the

following:

1. Blocking, backing, stripping, furring, and nailers.

2. Rough hardware.


1. Provision of temporary construction.

2. Provision of stainless steel shelves and plywood backing in Toilet Rooms


A. American Plywood Association

1. APA - Guide to Plywood Grades.

B. American Wood-Preservers’ Association:

1. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties, Pressure Treated.

2. AWPA C9 - Plywood, Pressure Treated.

C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application

of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

D. Forest Stewardship Council:

1. FSC Guidelines - Forest Stewardship Council Guidelines.

E. U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology:

1. DOC PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.

F. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau:

1. WCLIB - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.



A. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each preservative treated

material.


A. Deliver and store packaged products in original containers or bundles with seals unbroken and labels intact

until time of use.



Rough Carpentry

06 10 00 - 2

B. Keep materials dry. Where necessary, stack materials off ground on level flat forms, fully protected from

weather.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Wood: Bearing grade-trademark or accompanied by certificate of compliance of appropriate grading and

inspection agencies. Wood and plywood used for rough carpentry to come from Forest Stewardship Council

(FSC) Certified Forests.

1. Lumber:

a. (Blocking, Backing, Stripping, Furring, and Nailers): Preservative treated WCLIB

construction grade Douglas fir.

b. Air- or kiln-dry to maximum 25 percent moisture content, except maximum 19 percent for 2

inch lumber at time of surfacing.

c. Furnish S4S unless otherwise noted.

d. Size to conform to rules of governing standard. Sizes shown are nominal unless otherwise

noted.

2. Plywood: DOC PS 1 grade structural 1, C-C exterior, with no added urea-formaldehyde resins, fire-

retardant treated.

B. Rough Hardware: All exterior hardware shall be hot-dipped galvanized.

1. Screw Fasteners: ASTM C1002, self-drilling, self-tapping, corrosion-resistant type.

2. Expansion Anchors: Hilti, Inc.’s “Kwik-Bolt 3 Concrete Expansion Anchors and Hilti Drop-In

Anchors”; ITW Redhead’s “Trubolt Wedge Anchors and Multi-Set II Anchors”; or equal.

C. Preservative Treatment: Furnish in accordance with AWPA.

2.2 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENTS

A. Preservative Treatment:

1. Lumber: Treat in accordance with AWPA C2 with 0.25 pcf retainage.

2. Plywood: Treat in accordance with AWPA C9 with 0.25 pcf retainage.

B. After treatment and prior to shipping, air- or kiln-dry lumber to maximum 15 percent moisture content.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive rough carpentry work and verify that :

1. Installation of building components is complete to receive rough carpentry work.

2. Surfaces are satisfactory to receive work.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Split, warped, curled or otherwise defective material or careless improper workmanship will not be

accepted.

2. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.

3. Surfaces must be level, plumb and true to lines indicated on the drawings.



Rough Carpentry

06 10 00 - 3

4. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required

by recognized standards.

5. Discard units of material with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable

appearance of exposed members.

B. Provide blocking, grounds, nailers, stripping, and backing as indicated on drawings and as required to secure

other work.

C. Where wood is cut, sawed, planed, bored, or marred after preservative treatment, apply two heavy brush coats

of same material used in treatment. Allow preservation to dry prior to erecting members.




Fluid-Applied Waterproofing

07 14 00 - 1

SECTION 07 14 00 - FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of fluid-applied waterproofing systems (FAWS) as noted, complete

with related accessories.




A. Design Criteria: Fluid-applied waterproofing systems shall:

1. Prevent water or moisture from penetrating any area of waterproofing application.

2. Protect surfaces noted against permeation by water from above grade.

3. Permit three-way movement at junctions of more than one plane.

4. Be compatible with related waterproofing systems.

5. Be products of, or approved by, one manufacturer

6. Meet requirement of manufacturer’s specifications which are consistent with specified fluid-applied

waterproofing systems and construction conditions.


A. Coordination: Be responsible for coordinating work of this Section with related work provided under other

sections as required to avoid delays and prevent omission of related work required for correct installation.

B. Preinstallation Meeting:

1. Contractor shall arrange conference to review waterproofing work after review of submittals and prior

to delivering any material to site.

2. Conference to be attended by Architect, Owner’s Representative, Contractor, and Contractor’s

installer, agents of accepted manufacturers, and other installers whose work may be affected quality of

waterproofing.

3. Participants shall have had at least one week’s advance notice of meeting date and time.

4. The meeting shall be held at the job site.

5. The following major considerations shall be reviewed at the conference:

a. Review in detail the Contract Specifications, surface preparation, protection of adjacent

surfaces, installation procedures, field quality control, and other related items.

b. Review in detail job conditions, schedule, construction sequence, application requirements,

and quality of completed installation.

c. Review methods for storing and handling materials.

d. Review in detail the means of protecting completed work during remainder of construction

period.

e. Record discussions of conference and any conflict, incompatibility, or inadequacy, and

furnish a copy of record to each participant.

6. Contractor shall produce meeting notes that record discussions of conference and any conflict,

incompatibility, or inadequacy and they will indicate that the applicator of waterproofing has

reviewed and accepted the substrates for waterproofing.

7. Distribute meeting notes to all attendees prior to installation of waterproofing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.




07 14 00 - 2

B. Certifications: Submit the following certifications indicating that:

1. Manufacturer meets qualifications specified in this Section.

2. Installer meets qualifications Specified in this Section.

C. Statement of Contractor-Installer-Manufacturer Review: Submit written statement of compliance to Architect

and to manufacturer’s agent. In submitting to Architect substantiate transmittal to manufacturer’s agent by

including copy of transmittal form.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit installation details for fluid-applied waterproofing system to show details at

reinforcing, at terminations, at expansion joints in structure, membrane at cold joints, at intersections of

horizontal and vertical surfaces, flashings at drains, and at penetrations in membrane systems.

1. Submit for typical and non-typical conditions of Project. Manufacturer’s standard data sheets are not

acceptable for Shop Drawings.

2. Indicate and identify materials to be incorporated in the work, dimensions, thickness of each material

and system, and relationships to adjacent construction.

E. Samples: Only as requested.

F. Fluid-Applied Waterproofing Installer’s Compliance: Submit a written statement from Contractor’s installer

stating that:

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed with the primary roofing material manufacturer’s

representative.

2. Installer intends to comply with the Contract Documents.

3. Roofing details do not conflict with manufacturer’s product/system warranty.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring

special attention.

H. Statement of Installation: Upon completion, submit written statement in form acceptable to Architect signed by

Contractor, fluid-applied waterproofing manufacturer’s technical representative, and installer, stating that work

was provided in compliance with the Contract Documents, and that installation methods complied with

manufacturer’s printed instructions and were proper and adequate for conditions of application and use.

I. Submit copy of fluid-applied waterproofing manufacturer’s technical representative’s field inspection reports

on the installation and water test inspection of waterproofing.

J. Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of work, submit one copy of maintenance manual, identifying project

name, location and date, type of fluid-applied waterproofing system, and surface to which system was applied,

including sketches where necessary. Include recommendations for periodic inspections, care, and maintenance.

Identify common causes of damage with instructions for temporary patching until permanent repair can be

made.


A. Single Responsibility: Work shall be performed by single installer having undivided responsibility for

providing complete work, including all components and related work, and for performance and quality of

waterproofing.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Submit certified evidence proving specified materials have been manufactured

by same source and successfully installed on a yearly basis for a minimum of ten years on projects of similar

extent and complexity.

1. Manufacturer regularly and presently manufactures fluid-applied waterproofing as one of

manufacturer’s principal products.




07 14 00 - 3

2. Manufacturer’s product submitted has been in satisfactory and efficient use on three installations

similar or equivalent to this project for three years. Submit list of installations. List shall include

name and location of project and name of owner.

C. Installer Qualifications: Approval is required of installer, and will be based upon submission of certification

that:

1. Installer fluid-applied waterproofing is licensed or otherwise certified by manufacturer, and certified

by the manufacturer as having the necessary expertise to install the specified system.

2. Installer has installed a minimum of five projects using specified system and of similar scope and

complexity during the past five years.

D. Contractor Responsibilities: Contractor is solely responsible for quality assurance and control of waterproofing

work.

E. Manufacturer Representative:

1. Contractor is to arrange for the manufacturer’s technical representative to be on the project site to

advise on every phase of work and to perform other like services.

2. As a minimum representative shall be present for the first two workdays and of once each week

thereafter for minimum of two consecutive hours.

3. Representative shall give preparation and installation instructions, examine substrate before

installation and examine completed installation before covering.

F. Contractor-Applicator-Manufacturer Review: Contractor and applicator shall review Contract Documents with

representative of primary waterproofing materials manufacturer and obtain manufacture’s agreement that

selected systems are proper, compatible, and adequate for application shown and that conditions and details do

not conflict with manufacturer’s roofing and flashing warranty/guaranty.

G. Make no deviations from Contract Documents and reviewed shop drawings without prior written approval by

Owner, Architect, and waterproofing manufacturer.

H. Mockup: Before beginning installation, install fluid-applied waterproofing to portion of wall to demonstrate

surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment and execution quality.

1. If Architect determines mockup do not comply with requirements, reapply fluid-applied

waterproofing until mockup is approved.

2. Approved mockup may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial

Completion.



use. Each container shall be identified with material name, date of manufacture and stock number, and material

data sheet.

B. Store material in dry area out of direct sunlight. Protect materials from rain and physical damage. Storage area

temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Do not start work when precipitation threatens or when temperature is under 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Do not start work unless surface temperatures will be between 40 and 110 degrees Fahrenheit during

installation and throughout curing period.

3. Provide positive ventilation for areas not subject to natural ventilation throughout installation and 8

hours minimum during curing periods.

4. Post “No Smoking” signs in area during and for at least eight hours following installation period.




07 14 00 - 4

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer and installer, agreeing to repair or replace

fluid-applied waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Final Completion.

2. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of

the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by

Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS

A. Concealed Membrane:

1. Substrate: Concrete.

2. Fluid-applied Materials: Membrane coating.

3. Drainage composite with protection fabric.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fluid-Applied Waterproofing:

1. Description: Single component, liquid applied membrane with reinforcing fabric.

2. Product: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “CCW-MiraSEAL with DCH Reinforcing

Fabric”; or equal.

B. Flashings: As recommended by fluid-applied waterproofing manufacturer

C. Protection Course: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “CCW Protection Board-V”; or equal.

D. Drainage Composite with Protection Fabric:

1. Description: High flow drainage composite consisting of a high impact polystyrene core with

a non-woven polypropylene moisture retention mat and filter fabric on the top side of the board

to prevent passage of particles into the drainage core and add water retention to the system.

Protection fabric shall be 16 ounce per square yard, needle-punched non-woven

polypropylene fabric, non-biodegradable and stabilized to resistant mildew, insects and

common soil chemicals.

2. Product: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “CCW MiraDRAIN with Protection

Fabric”; or equal.

E. Sealant: Low modulus, unmodified polyurethane or polysulfide base as recommended by fluid-applied

protected membrane roofing system manufacturer.

F. Backer Rod: Extruded, closed cell flexible compressible polyethylene foam rod.

G. Membrane Cleaner: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “Carlisle Weathered Membrane Cleaner”; or

equal.




07 14 00 - 5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine receiving surfaces and verify that:

1. Surfaces are free from bituminous materials, form release agents, bond breakers, deleterious curing

compounds, water repellants or other special surface treatments, and that surface is otherwise properly

prepared for application of fluid-applied waterproofing system.

2. Provisions for expansion-contraction are consistent with bridging capability of fluid-applied

waterproofing system.

3. Penetrations have been securely installed and properly flashed in place.

4. Curing methods used for concrete are compatible with membrane system.

5. Substrate is relatively even without noticeable high spots or depressions and shall be dry, relatively

smooth, free of protrusions, debris, sharp edges or foreign materials and must be free of

accumulated water, ice and snow.

B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of application implies

acceptance of substrate area as suitable to accept fluid-applied waterproofing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning:

1. Thoroughly clean receiving surfaces of foreign material such as dirt, dust, free particles, oil, grease,

laitance, and other contaminants which will affect bond of the coating in accordance with fluid-

applied waterproofing system.

2. Use only cleaning materials and methods recommended by fluid-applied waterproofing system

manufacturer.

3. Surfaces shall be vacuum cleaned or broomed.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with requirements of fluid-applied waterproofing system manufacturer.

C. Install a 1 inch face, 45 degree cant of sealant at all angle changes and inside corners including projections

through the deck, walls, curbs, bumpers, similar items.

D. All cracks over 1/16 "inch in width and all moving cracks under 1/16 inch in width shall be saw cut to 1/4

inch minimum in width and depth. Saw cut a 1/4 by 1/4 inch kerf around drain flanges. Clean, prime and fill

saw cuts flush with sealant.

E. All moving cracks over 1/16 inch wide and all expansion joints less than 1inch wide shall be cleaned,

primed, fitted with a backing rod and caulked with sealant. For larger joints, contact fluid=applied

waterproofing representative.

F. Allow all sealant to cure thoroughly.

G. Apply a 6 inch wide, 45 mils thick stripe-coat of fluid-applied waterproofing centered over all sealed

cracks, hairline cracks, joints, and outside corners. Install reinforcing fabric.

H. Apply a 45 mil thick stripe-coat of fluid-applied waterproofing over sealant cants and extending 4 inches

onto the horizontal deck. Install reinforcing fabric.

I. All required metal shall be installed at this time. Apply a stripe coat fluid-applied waterproofing, 45 mils

thick, 6 inches wide, centered over all transitions from concrete to metal flashings and reinforce with

reinforcing fabric. Allow the stripe coat to cure a minimum of three hours or to a firm consistency.

J. Protection of Adjacent Surfaces: Use drop cloths or masking tape as required.




07 14 00 - 6

3.3 MEMBRANE COATING

A. Apply fluid-applied waterproofing and related work in accordance with materials manufacturer’s

specifications for systems approved for this Project unless otherwise noted.

B. Apply fluid-applied waterproofing in one uniform coat at the rate of one gallon minimum per 26 square feet

or as needed in order to obtain a minimum thickness of 60 wet mils, including coverage of detail work. Use

a 1/4inch notch squeegee to achieve a uniform thickness, then back roll to smooth coating

C. Immediately install reinforcing fabric working the fabric into the wet fluid-applied waterproofing until

reinforcing fabric is saturated, avoiding trapped air, wrinkles and fish mouths. Cut and lay flat wrinkles and

fish mouths.

D. In the event the entire surface is not completed in one day and becomes contaminated, prior to beginning

application clean an area 6 inches wide along the edge of the previously fluid-applied membrane with a

cloth wet with membrane cleaner. New work shall overlap the existing work by 6 inches.

E. Allow the first coat of fluid-applied waterproofing to cure three hours minimum or to a firm consistency.

F. Apply the second coat of fluid-applied waterproofing at the rate of one gallon minimum per 26 square feet

or as needed in order to obtain a minimum thickness of 60 wet mils over the first coat of fluid-applied

waterproofing. Cover the reinforcing fabric t for complete encapsulation. Fluid-applied waterproofing may

be applied wet material onto wet material with no displacement of previously applied detail coats,

previously applied coats and/or reinforcing fabric placement.

G. Drainage Composite with Protection Fabric:

1. Install drainage composite with protection fabric over root barrier.

2. Install drainage composite with protection fabric with protection fabric side facing upward. The

first panels should be positioned with the flanged edge facing uphill.

a. Place drainage composite with protection fabric so water flows with the overlap.

b. Cut the fabric along the flanged edge and remove to expose the edge of the

drainage board core and flange.

c. Place the dimpled edge over the preceding flanged edge to join adjacent panels.

d. Fabric on the drainage board panels extends beyond the edges of the polystyrene core to

provide an overlap to adjacent panels. When placing panels adjacent each other, overlap

fabric in the direction of water flow.

3. Cover drainage composite within 7 days of installation to prevent UV exposure.


A. Owner may engage independent testing agency to verify that fluid-applied waterproofing system conforms with

manufacture’s specifications.

1. Owner’s Testing Agency will make, examine, and test as required at least three 1 foot square cutouts

located at Architect’s discretion after prescribed drying period.

B. Contractor shall:

1. Patch cutouts to Architect’s satisfaction.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean stains from adjacent surfaces with cleaning materials recommended by the fluid-applied waterproofing

system manufacturer.




07 14 00 - 7

B. Remove foreign matter from finished coating surfaces, masking protection, equipment, material, and debris

from roof and storage area.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect application against damage from construction operations.




Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing

07 55 56 - 1

SECTION 07 55 56 – FLUID-APPLIED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of fluid–applied protected membrane roofing system to receive

engineered growth media and stone ballast as noted complete with related accessories.



2. Provision of roof vegetation.


A. Design Criteria: Fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system shall:

1. Prevent water or moisture from penetrating any area of fluid-applied roofing system installation.

2. Meet requirements of manufacturer’s specifications which are consistent with specified fluid-applied

roofing system and construction conditions.


A. Coordination:

1. Insure that the concrete finish and curing methods are in accordance with requirements of fluid-

applied roofing system manufacturer for the proper installation of fluid-applied protected membrane

roofing system.

2. Be responsible for coordinating work with installation of associated roof penetrations and

counterflashings installed by other sections as Work of this section proceeds.

3. Be responsible for coordinating work of this Section with related work provided under other sections

as required avoiding delays and preventing omission of related work required for correct installation.

B. Preinstallation Meeting:

1. Contractor shall arrange conference to review fluid-applied protected membrane roofing work after

review of submittals and prior to delivering any material to site.

2. Conference to be attended by Architect, Owner’s Representative, Contractor, and Contractor’s

installer, agents of accepted manufacturers, installers of other work in and around fluid-applied

protected membrane roofing that must precede, follow, or penetrate roofing (including Mechanical

and Electrical Installers as applicable).

3. Participants shall have had at least one week’s advance notice of meeting date and time.

4. Hold conference at the job site.

5. The following major considerations shall be reviewed at the conference:

a. Review in detail the Contract specifications, roof plans, roof decks, surface preparation,

slopes, drainage, flashing details, and other related roofing.

b. Review in detail job conditions, schedule, construction sequence, installation requirements,

and quality of completed installation.

c. Review methods for storing and handling materials.

d. Review in detail the means of protecting completed work during remainder of construction

period.

e. Discuss the acceptance of the substrate as indicated under “Execution” below.

6. Contractor shall produce meeting notes that record discussions of conference and any conflict,

incompatibility, or inadequacy and they will indicate that the installer of roofing has reviewed and

accepted the substrates for roofing.

7. Distribute meeting notes to all attendees prior to installation of fluid-applied roofing.




07 55 56 - 2

C. Scheduling:

1. All fluid-applied protected membrane roofing must be completed on each work day. Phased

construction of final fluid-applied roofing will not be permitted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

A. Certifications: Submit the following certifications indicating:

1. Manufacturer meets qualifications specified in this Section.

2. Installer meets qualifications Specified in this Section.

B. Statement of Contractor-Installer-Manufacturer Review: Submit written statement of compliance to Architect

and to manufacturer’s agent. In submitting to Architect substantiate transmittal to manufacturer’s agent by

including copy of transmittal form.

B. Samples:

1. Perimeter Rocks: Minimum two square feet of rocks.


C. Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing Installer’s Compliance: Submit a written statement from

Contractor’s installer stating that:

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed with the primary roofing material manufacturer’s

representative.

2. Installer intends to comply with the Contract Documents.

3. Roofing details do not conflict with manufacturer’s product/system warranty.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring

special attention.

E. Statement of Installation: Upon completion, submit written statement signed by Contractor and Contractor’s

installer, stating that fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system complied with the drawings and

specifications, and that installation methods complied with manufacturer’s printed instructions and were proper

and adequate for conditions of installation and performance.

F. Submit copy of fluid-applied waterproofing manufacturer’s technical representative’s field inspection reports

on the installation and water test inspection of waterproofing.

G. Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of work, submit one copy of maintenance manual, identifying project

name, location and data, type of fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system, and surface to which system

was applied, including sketches where necessary. Include recommendations for periodic inspections, care, and

maintenance. Identify common causes of damage with instructions for temporary patching until permanent

repair can be made.


A. Single Responsibility: Work shall be performed by single installer having undivided responsibility for

providing complete work, including all components and related work, and for performance and quality of

waterproofing.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Submit certified evidence proving specified materials have been manufactured

by same source and successfully installed on a yearly basis for a minimum of ten years on projects of similar

extent and complexity.

1. Manufacturer regularly and presently manufactures fluid-applied protected membrane roofing sysrem

as one of manufacturer’s principal products.




07 55 56 - 3

2. Manufacturer’s product submitted has been in satisfactory and efficient use on three installations

similar or equivalent to this project for three years. Submit list of installations. List shall include

name and location of project and name of owner.

C. Installer Qualifications: Approval is required of installer, and will be based upon submission of certification

that:

1. Installer of fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system licensed or otherwise certified by

manufacturer, and certified by the manufacturer as having the necessary expertise to install the

specified system.

2. Installer has installed a minimum of five projects using specified system and of similar scope and

complexity during the past five years.

D. Contractor Responsibilities: Contractor is solely responsible for quality assurance and control of waterproofing

work.

E. Manufacturer Representative:

1. Contractor is to arrange for the manufacturer’s technical representative to be on the project site to

advise on every phase of work and to perform other like services.

2. As a minimum representative shall be present for the first two workdays and of once each week

thereafter for minimum of two consecutive hours.

3. Representative shall give preparation and installation instructions, examine substrate before

installation, witness flood tests, and examine completed installation before covering.

F. Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing Installer’s Qualifications: Installer shall be licensed or otherwise

certified by manufacturer of fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system and be able to show evidence of

at least five years experience in successfully applying fluid-applied roofing system similar to those incurred on

this Project.

G. Contractor-Installer-Manufacturer Review: Contractor and Contractor’s installer shall review Architect’s

Drawings and Specifications with agent of fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system systems

manufacturer and obtain their agreement that selected systems are proper, compatible, and adequate for

installation shown and that conditions and details do not conflict with manufacturer’s recommendations.

H. Make no deviations from Contract Documents without prior written approval by Architect and roofing

manufacture.



use. Each container shall be identified with material name, date of manufacture and stock number, and material

data sheet.

B. Store material in dry area out of direct sunlight. Protect materials from rain and physical damage. Storage area

temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS


1. Do not start work when precipitation threatens or when temperature is under 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Do not start work unless surface temperatures will be between 40 and 110 degrees Fahrenheit during

installation and throughout curing period.

3. Provide positive ventilation for areas not subject to natural ventilation throughout installation and 8

hours minimum during curing periods.

4. Post “No Smoking” signs in area during and for at least eight hours following installation period.




07 55 56 - 4

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer and installer, agreeing to repair or replace

fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system that fails in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Final Completion.

2. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of

the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by

Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUID-APPLIED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM

A. Description:

1. Primer.

2. Fluid-applied membrane system.

3. Protection course.

4. Root barrier.

5. Drainage composite with protection fabric

6. Up to 6 inches of engineered growth media.

7. Perimeter rocks as indicated on Drawings.

B. Product: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “Ultra Extensive Green Roof System”; or

equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Surface Primer: As recommended by fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system manufacturer.

B. Fluid-Applied Membrane System:

1. Description: Hot-applied, rubberized asphalt compound with reinforcing fabric.

2. Product: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “CCW-500 Hot–Applied Membrane with

CCW-500 Reinforcing Fabric”; or equal.

C. Flashings:

1. Non-Exposed Areas: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “CCW-711-90 90 mil sheet

Membrane and Flashing”; or equal.

2. Exposed Areas: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “Sure-Seal Fleece Black EPDM Sheet”

or equal

D. Protection Course: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “CCW Protection Board-HS”; or equal.

E. Root Barrier: 16-mil tightly woven HDPE scrim with 2-mil polymeric coating on both sides specifically

formulated for use in below grade applications to resist root growth and soil bacteria.

F. Root Barrier Cleaner: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “Carlisle Weathered Membrane Cleaner”;

or equal.




07 55 56 - 5

G. Drainage Composite with Protection Fabric:

1. Description: High flow drainage composite consisting of a high impact polystyrene core with

a non-woven polypropylene moisture retention mat and filter fabric on the top side of the board

to prevent passage of particles into the drainage core and add water retention to the system.

Protection fabric shall be 16 ounce per square yard, needle-punched non-woven

polypropylene fabric, non-biodegradable and stabilized to resistant mildew, insects and

common soil chemicals.

2. Product: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “CCW MiraDRAIN with CCW 300HV”;

or equal.

H. Sealant: Low modulus, unmodified polyurethane or polysulfide base as recommended by fluid-applied

protected membrane roofing system manufacturer.

I. Backer Rod: Extruded, closed cell flexible compressible polyethylene foam rod.

J. Engineered Growth Media:

1. Description: lightweight FLL-approved growth media used for Green Roof applications.

2. Product: Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc.’s “Carlisle Engineered Growth Media”; or

equal.

K. Perimeter Rocks: Nominal 1-1/2” – 2 1/2” diameter rounded water worn gravel (Grey and tan granite) which conforms to ASTM D448, gradation size #2, applied at a minimum of 10 pounds per square foot.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine receiving surfaces and verify following that:

1. Surfaces are free from bituminous materials, from release agents, bond breakers, deleterious curing

compounds, water repellants, or other special surface treatments, and that surface is otherwise

properly prepared for installation of fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system.

2. Provisions for expansion-contraction are consistent with bridging capability of fluid-applied protected

membrane roofing system.

3. Concrete decks have completed minimum 28 day curing period and are completely dry and pass a

four hour rubber mat test (no condensation) prior to installation fluid-applied protected membrane

roofing system. Mat shall be taped to deck on all edges.

4. Penetrations have been securely installed and properly flashed in place.

5. Curing methods used for concrete are compatible with fluid-applied protected membrane roofing

system.

6. Substrate is relatively even without noticeable high spots or depressions and shall be dry, relatively

smooth, free of protrusions, debris, sharp edges or foreign materials and must be free of

accumulated water, ice and snow.

B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of installation implies

acceptance of substrate area as suitable to accept fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning:

1. Thoroughly clean receiving surfaces of foreign material such as dirt, dust, free particles, oil, grease,

laitance, and other contaminants which will affect bond of the coating in accordance with fluid-

applied protected membrane roofing system.




07 55 56 - 6

2. Use only cleaning materials and methods recommended by fluid-applied protected membrane roofing

system manufacturer.

3. Surfaces shall be vacuum cleaned or broomed.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with requirements of fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system

manufacturer.

C. Cracks: Saw cut or rout all shrinkage cracks in concrete over 1/16 inch in width, clean and fill flush with

sealant.

D. Fill expansion, control, and construction joints to be covered with fluid-applied protected membrane roofing

system with sealant.

E. Protection of Adjacent Surfaces: Use drop cloths or masking tape as required.

3.3 FLUID-APPLIED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM

A. Flashing and Detail Installation: Follow fluid-applied protected membrane system applicable waterproofing

system specifications for specific surface preparation procedures, membrane positioning and adhesive

application requirements.

B. Membrane Installation - Follow fluid-applied membrane roofing system manufacturer’s specifications for

specific surface preparation procedures, membrane positioning and adhesive application requirements.

1. Apply primer to all surfaces and at the juncture of all horizontal surfaces to receive fluid-

applied membrane roofing, including over flashings, at published square feet per gallon rate.

Avoid puddles. Allow primer to dry for one hour minimum or until the primer will not transfer to

touch, eight hours maximum.

2. Heat fluid-applied membrane roofing with continuous agitation and apply at temperatures

between 330 to 375 degrees Fahrenheit.

3. Apply heated fluid-applied membrane roofing to primed area and any pre-installed flashings at

a rate of 17.8 square feet per gallon or as required to obtain an average thickness of 90 mils.

4. Apply reinforcing fabric and any required flashings while membrane is still warm and tacky.

Cut and trim off any wrinkles or overlap sections of the reinforcing fabric or hot the fabric

splices together with fluid-applied membrane roofing.

5. Apply a second coat of fluid-applied membrane roofing at a rate of 12.8 square feet per gallon

or as required to obtain an average thickness of 125 mils. Total thickness of the fluid-applied

membrane roofing shall be 215 mils.

6. Apply protection course into the last course of fluid-applied membrane roofing and splice the

protection board seams together with fluid-applied membrane roofing.

C. Root Barrier:

1. Sweep the surface of the membrane to remove all debris and loose or foreign material.

2. Overlap the adjacent root barrier sheets a minimum of 4 inches in preparation for splicing.

3. Splicing surfaces shall be clean. Remove dirt/contaminants from splice areas with root barrier

cleaner. Cleaner must be used to remove surface oxidation on the root barrier surface when the

material has been exposed to the elements for 7 days. Apply root barrier cleaner with a clean other

white rag.

D. Drainage Composite with Protection Fabric:

1. Install drainage composite with protection fabric over root barrier.

2. Install drainage composite with protection fabric with protection fabric side facing upward. The

first panels should be positioned with the flanged edge facing uphill.

a. Place drainage composite with protection fabric so water flows with the overlap.




07 55 56 - 7

b. Cut the fabric along the flanged edge and remove to expose the edge of the

drainage board core and flange.

c. Place the dimpled edge over the preceding flanged edge to join adjacent panels.

d. Fabric on the drainage board panels extends beyond the edges of the polystyrene core to

provide an overlap to adjacent panels. When placing panels adjacent each other, overlap

fabric in the direction of water flow.

3. Cover drainage composite within 7 days of installation to prevent UV exposure.

E. Engineered Growth Media:

1. Spread engineered green media to the specified depth, plus 10- 15 percent. Dispense to locations

in a manner that will not overload the structure.

2. Thoroughly soak soil with water using a sprinkler, hand sprayer, or sub-irrigation system (if

installed at the same time as the Green Roof application).

F. Perimeter Rocks: Place on top of protection course as indicated on Drawings


A. Owner may engage independent testing agency to verify that fluid-applied protected membrane roofing system

conforms to manufacturer’s specifications.

1. Owner’s Testing Agency will make, examine, and test as required at least three one foot square

cutouts located at Architect’s discretion after prescribed drying period.

B. Contractor shall:

1. Patch cutouts to provide a watertight membrane to Architect’s satisfaction.

2. Water test fluid-applied roofing system by flooding and maintaining 2 inch depth for minimum of 24

hours. Do not test any coated areas sooner than 24 hours following completion of installation. Test

prior to installing of root barrier.

3. In event fluid-applied roofing system fails, remove substandard fluid-applied roofing system and

apply new at no additional cost to the Contract.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean stains from adjacent surfaces with cleaning materials recommended by the fluid-applied protected

membrane roofing system manufacturer.

B. Remove foreign matter from finished coating surfaces, masking protection, equipment, material, and debris.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installation against damage from construction operations.

B. Limit traffic over completed roof membrane sections to essential personnel only. Heavily traveled areas

(staging areas, corridors used to transport green roof components) must be protected using expanded or

extruded insulation covered with 1/2 inch thick plywood or other sheathing




Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

07 62 00 - 1

SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of sheet metal flashing and trim work as shown or noted. Only more

important items are shown or noted.


1. Provision of roof drains.


A. American Welding Society:

1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code – Steel.

2. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

2. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Assoc. Inc.:

1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.


A. Coordination: Coordinate details with details of adjacent work to assure watertightness, proper attachments,

sealed joints, tight flashings, and clean junctions.

B. Scheduling: Insure timely delivery of items to be embedded in work of other sections and furnish setting

drawings or templates and setting instructions for exact installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

B. Shop Drawings: Show material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings,

terminations, and installation details.



A. Deliver, store, and handle packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until

time of use.

B. Store delivered products in clean, safe, dry area.

C. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to

ensure drainage.

D. Prevent contact with materials causing discoloration or staining.




07 62 00 - 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 302 or 304; minimum 0.015 inch thickness; stainless steel

fastenings.

B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B370; H00 temper, 20 ounces per square foot; stainless steel, hard copper, brass, or

bronze fastenings as recommended by manufacturer of copper sheet metal.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as sheet metal unless otherwise noted.

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.

C. Solder and Flux Items: Remelted or reworked solder will not be permitted. Types as recommended by

manufacturer of sheet metal to be soldered.

D. Expansion Shields, Packing, and Wedges: Lead or other nonferrous alloys as approved by Architect.

E. Flashing Compound/Tape:

1. Description: Polyisobutylene type, nonskinning, nondrying.

2. Product: Schnee-Morehead, Inc.’s “SM5229 Tacky Tape Industrial Tape Sealant”; or equal.

F. Wood Nailers: Meet requirements of Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. Provide as required for lead

counterflashing.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Preparation: Verify measurements in field and coordinate with related work as required for proper and

adequate fabrication and installation.

B. General Requirements:

1. Items of standard manufacture may be furnished in lieu of specially fabricated items provided such

items meet requirements shown or noted.

2. As far as practicable, form and fabricate sheet metal items in shop. Where circumstances require on-

site fabrication provide quality equal to shop work.

3. Accurately reproduce profiles and bends as shown or noted. Ensure that intersections are sharp, even,

and true; that plane surfaces are free from buckles and waves; that seams follow direction of water

flow.

4. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

5. Where work is not otherwise shown or noted, design and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA.

6. Reinforce properly as required for strength and appearance.

7. Cut, fit, and drill sheet metal as required to accommodate accessory items and work adjacent or

adjoining.

8. Exposed Edges of Sheet Metal: Fold, bead, or return; no raw edges will be permitted.

C. Sheet Metal Joints:

1. In general, provide lock joints; where impractical, lap, rivet, and solder.

2. Turn lock joints on exposed surfaces in direction of flow.

3. Solder joints and miters.

4. Where positive joining is required, arc-weld in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, or braze.




07 62 00 - 3

D. Sheet Metal Usage:

1. Where items are noted as typical sheet metal, use stainless sheet steel of thickness noted under

Materials article unless otherwise noted.

E. Soldering:

1. Pre-tin edges 1-1/2 inch both sides prior to soldering.

2. Use heavy soldering coppers of blunt design.

3. Immediately after applying flux, solder slowly with well-heated coppers, thoroughly heating seams

and completely sweating solder through full width with at least 1 inch width along seams.

4. After soldering, immediately neutralize any acid flux and flush with clean water.

F. Expansion-Contraction of Sheet Metal Runs: Provide loose locking slip joint at maximum 8 feet from external

or internal corners, at every 24 feet of straight runs unless manufacturer recommends more frequent interval,

and one at center of runs less than 20 feet but more than 8 feet long.

G. Expansion-Contraction of Sheet Metal Runs at Copings: Provide drive cleat expansion joints at maximum 4

feet from external or internal corners, at every 10 feet of straight runs unless manufacturer recommends more

frequent interval, and one at center of runs less than 20 feet but more than 8 feet long.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal: Manufacturer's standard finish unless otherwise noted.

1. Stainless Steel: Manufacturer's standard No. 2D finish.

2. Copper: Natural.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive items and verify that:

1. Dimensions are correct to receive items.

2. Adjacent or adjoining surfaces are clean, dry, reasonably smooth, and free from defects; that wood

surfaces to be in contact with sheet metal are free from projecting nails.

3. Roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place,

and nailing strips located.

4. Roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

5. There is absence of other conditions that will adversely affect installation.

B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Where flashing and sheet metal work is related to built-up bituminous roofing, install under supervision of

built-up bituminous roofing applicator.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install items in accordance with SMACNA unless otherwise noted.

B. Where installation requires performing work of fabrication, meet requirements of applicable standards of

Fabrication Article of this Section.




07 62 00 - 4

C. Apply flashing compound at slip joints or wherever else metal-to-metal contact occurs and movement may be

anticipated.

D. Unless otherwise noted or required by manufacturer, fasten sheet metal runs to underlying material by nailing

through slotted holes in flange at 3 inches on center. Provide waterproof washers wherever required fasteners

penetrate flashings. Where sheet metal occurs over roofing materials or other sheet metal, use nails with 1 inch

metal disks.

E. Insure that items are installed in true and accurate alignment with other items and related work; that joints are

accurately fitted; that exposed surfaces are free from dents; that corners are reinforced; that seams are

watertight.

F. Secure sheet metal flashing and trim in place using concealed fasteners.

G. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to

profiles.

H. Seal metal joints watertight.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect sheet metal work as required against construction damage; remove prior to final acceptance.




Joint Sealants

07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of joint sealants and related materials where noted.


1. Provision of glazing materials for installing glass.

2. Provision of flashing compounds.

3. Provision of sealants for ceramic tile work.

4. Provision of sealants for crack treatment under fluid applied waterproofing and roofing.



1. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

2. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid

Applied Sealants.

B. Bay Area Air Quality Management District:

1. BAAQMD Reg. 8 Rule 51 - Adhesive and Sealant Products.


A. Contractor is responsible for the design selection and installation of the sealants, as well as the performance

of the sealant system

B. Except as otherwise indicated, joint sealants are required to establish and maintain airtight and waterproof

continuous seals on a permanent basis, with recognized limitations of wear and aging as indicated for each

application. Failures of installed sealants to comply with this requirement will be recognized as failures of

materials and workmanship.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

B. Samples:

1. Manufacturer’s bead samples of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each

product exposed to view.

2. Sealant beads applied to actual materials used in project for testing adhesion.


C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter

conditions requiring special attention.


A. Applicator’s Qualifications: Applicator of exterior, elastomeric sealants shall be experienced in applying

sealants similar to those specified.



Joint Sealants

07 92 00 - 2


A. Delivery: Deliver sealants and related accessories in factory-sealed, unopened containers bearing

manufacturer’s name, batch number, product designation, color, expiration period, curing time, and mixing

instructions for multi-component materials..

B. Storage: Store in original, unopened containers or packages. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for

storage temperature and shelf life.

C. Handling: Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for handling products containing toxic materials. Keep

flammable material away from heat, sparks, and open flame. Use recommended solvents and cleaning agents

for cleaning tools, equipment, and skin.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Apply materials only when surface and ambient temperatures fall within

manufacturer-recommended ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these

temperature ranges.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS


1. Sealant systems shall be compatible with contacting membranes, premolded joint filler, and fluid

applied waterproofing systems.

2. Sealant systems shall not stain adjacent exposed surfaces.

3. Manufacturer’s standard color range shall permit matching sealants to color of contacting surfaces.

4. All sealants shall have VOC content of less than or equal to 100 g/L.

5. Sealants shall meet or exceed requirements of BAAQMD, Reg. 8, Rule 51 for Volatile Organic

Compound (VOC) emissions.

B. Sealant Type 1:

1. Description: One component low modulus silicone sealant.

2. Product: General Electric Co.’s “Silpruf SCS2000”; Dow Corning Corp.’s “Dow Corning 795

Building Sealant”; or approved equal.

3. Location: Typical sealant unless otherwise noted.

C. Sealant Type 2:

1. Description: Multi-part polyurethane, minimum Shore A hardness of 40.

2. Product: Tremco’s “THC/900”; Pecora Corp.’s “Dynatred”; or approved equal.

3. Location: Horizontal joints subject to traffic abrasion.

D. Sealant Type 3:

1. Description: One component silicone sealant.

2. Product: General Electric Co.’s “SCS1700”; Dow Corning Corp.’s “Dow Corning 786 Mildew-

Resistant Silicone Sealant”; or approved equal.

3. Location: Ceramic tile and plumbing fixtures.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Primers, Sealers, Surface Conditioners, Solvents: As recommended by manufacturer of sealant material for

each substrate. Solvents shall be residue-free.



Joint Sealants

07 92 00 - 3

B. Typical Back-Up Material, Fillers, and Joint Packing.: Round flexible, polyolefin foam rod made of non-

absorbing outer skin and resilient interior network of both open and closed cells that do not out-gas when

ruptured and meeting requirements of ASTM C1330 Type B. Incompressible materials or acrylic-, asphalt-,

oil-, or solvent-containing materials will not be permitted.

C. Release Materials: Polyethylene film, masking tape, or similar materials as recommended by sealant

manufacturer.

D. Cleaning Materials: Nonstaining and not otherwise injurious to exposed surfaces; for metal and glass, use

xylol, tolerol, or methyl ethyl ketone.

2.3 MIXING

A. Multi-Component Sealants:

1. Mix at job site with suitable power-operated equipment.

2. Ensure components are mixed with identical batch control numbers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints and spaces to receive sealant and verify that:

1. Substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

2. Surfaces are free from bituminous materials, form release agents, bond breakers, deleterious curing

compounds, water repellants, or other special surface treatments.

3. Joints to be sealed are free of incompatible and loose materials.

4. Metallic surfaces are free from rust, mill-scale, coatings, oil, and grease.

5. There is absence or removal of protective materials from aluminum surfaces.

6. Concrete and masonry surfaces have properly cured.

7. Joints and spaces requiring sealing are at correct or normal width.

B. Do not start application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. The following requirements are in additional to requirements of ASTM C1193.

B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.

1. Thoroughly clean receiving surfaces, joints, and spaces of foreign material which could interfere with

adhesion of joint sealants, including dirt, paints, mill-scale, rust, oil, grease, waterproofing, water

repellents, water, and surface dirt.

2. Clean porous surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or acid washing to

produce clean sound substrate.

3. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation vacuuming or blowing out joints.

4. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.

5. Use only cleaning materials recommended by sealant manufacturer; do not use soap, detergents, or

water-based cleaners on masonry, metal, or glass.

6. Do not permit solvents to air dry; wipe surfaces free of solvent using clean, dry white cloth or white

lintless paper.

C. Remove moisture and frost.

D. Protection:

1. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.



Joint Sealants

07 92 00 - 4

2. Use masking tape where required to control lap of materials on adjacent surfaces and remove upon

completion.

3. Be responsible for damage to adjacent surfaces caused by sealant operations.

E. Verify proper surface and ambient temperatures.

F. Joint Priming:

1. Make preliminary tests to insure primers will not stain exposed materials or deteriorate back-up

material.

2. Prime surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer immediately prior to sealing.

3. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining

surfaces.

G. In all other respects, prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install joint sealants in exact accordance with manufacturer’s specifications, procedures established during

demonstration, and ASTM C1193.

B. Do not obstruct weep systems.

C. Bonding Surface Depths: Control depths with back-up material; in placing preformed bead or rope types, do

not twist or bend.

1. Typical Joints: 1/4 inch.

2. Concrete Joints Where Movement is Expected: 1/2 to 3/4 inch.

3. Joints Less than 1/2 Inch Wide: From 1/2 width to full width of joint.

4. Joints Greater than 1/2 Inch Wide, but No Greater than Two Inches: 1/2 width of joint.

D. Release Materials:

1. Use release material between back-up material and sealant where required to confine adhesion of

sealant to surfaces of materials joined.

2. Conditions requiring release materials include, but are not necessarily limited to, joints subject to

movement where sealant would otherwise contact back of joint or adhere to back-up materials and

over support backing at traffic-bearing joints.

3. Release material will not be required where back-up material is polyethylene.

E. Accurately position filler material within joint to establish and control the uniform designated thickness of

sealant. Exercise care in the installation of joint backing to see that the backing is not set too far below surface,

thereby increasing the depth of sealant.

F. Apply material with sufficient pressure to completely fill the void space and to assure complete wetting of the

contact area to obtain uniform adhesion.

1. During application keep tip of nozzle at bottom of joint, forcing sealant to fill from the bottom to top.

2. Move tip along joint to completely fill the joint. Finish joints smooth and flush with adjacent surface

unless detailed otherwise.

G. Tooling:

1. Using tooling agent recommended by sealant manufacturer, neatly tool joints to compress material,

improve adhesion to surfaces joined, and achieve slightly concave surface.

2. Repair air pockets exposed by tooling.

3. Use masking tape where required to facilitate tooling and remove upon completion.



Joint Sealants

07 92 00 - 5

3.4 PATCHING

A. Patch or replace defective and damaged joint sealants as directed by Architect.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled in applying sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s

recommendations.

B. Remove wet material from adjacent surfaces before it has set.

C. Do not use cleaning agents.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from

damage.




Steel Frames

08 12 13 - 1

SECTION 08 12 13 - STEEL FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of steel frames, including but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Door frames.

2. Glazed windows.


1. Provision of door silencers (mutes).

2. Provision of door hardware.

3. Provision of galvanized screen between top of door and overhead concrete.

4. Custom integral screened louver to be manufactured as part of window frames.


A. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Door and Frames.

2. ANSI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.





A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate steel frame details with work supporting or adjoining steel frames.

2. Coordinate steel frame work with frame opening construction with doors and hardware.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data including preparation of metal for priming and priming material.

B. Shop Drawings: Show each opening indicating opening criteria, frame types, fire-resistive rating, hardware

locations, and details including anchors and attachment to adjacent structure, dimensions, machining criteria

for hardware.



A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.

B. Deliver, store, and handle items to prevent damage or deformation.

C. Accept frames on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage

D. Storage and Protection:

1. Protect frames with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent

corrosion.



Steel Frames

08 12 13 - 2

2. Provide clean, dry surfaces or platforms as required, and protect from deterioration and foreign

matter.

3. Do not store on ground.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAME TYPES

A. Welded Door Frames:

1. Location: Typical unless otherwise noted.

2. One-piece welded construction, fabricated to profiles shown on Drawings and in accordance with

requirements of this Section.

3. Grade: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1.

B. Glazed Window Frames:

1. Fabricate to profiles shown on the Drawings and in accordance with requirements of this Section.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Zinc-iron alloy finish (galvannealed) to meet requirements of ASTM A653/A653M,

coating designation A60.

B. Factory Applied Primer: Provide primer compatible with paint systems specified in Section 09 91 00 -

Painting.

C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard units.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate metal frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Preparation:

1. Verify partition dimension and door details; obtain reviewed hardware schedule, templates, and other

information.

2. Verify size and design of each opening.

C. Material Usage: Fabricate frames from galvanized sheet steel.

D. Gage: 14 gage.

E. Welded Non-Rated Door Frames:

1. Fabricate steel frames as rigid units, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp, or buckle.

Accurately press-brake profiles as detailed.

2. Weld continuous to full depth of frame. Grind welds smooth, dress, and make smooth, flush and

invisible. Filler to conceal welds or manufacturing defects is not acceptable.

3. Miter corners of frames unless otherwise noted.

4. Preassemble frames in shop and deliver to job with spreader bar at sill; or tie frames in pairs to form

box.

5. Anchors:

a. Bolted anchors – with stainless steel bolts

b. Provide minimum four per side and two per head.

c. Space side anchors evenly at maximum 28 inches on center with top and bottom anchors at

minimum distance from top and bottom hinges.



Steel Frames

08 12 13 - 3

F. Glazed Window Frames:

1. Fabricate similar to welded door frames.

2. Where frames occur in fire-resistive rated partitions, fabricate to meet requirements of fire-resistive

door frames.

3. Wherever practical, fit and assemble glazed partitions in the manufacturing plant. Clearly identify

work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at the

project site.

4. Screws for glazing stop shall be tamper-proof.

G. Provisions for Hardware and Security Devices:

1. Prepare frames for hardware in accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in

place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.

2. Factory machine frames for finish hardware and security devices in accordance with templates.

3. Provide reinforcing and cutouts as required to receive hardware and security devices.

4. Mortise Hardware: Provide cutouts with drilled and tapped minimum 10 gauge steel reinforcement.

5. Other Hardware: Make total thickness of areas requiring reinforcement equal to nominal thickness of

fastener required by hardware item.

6. Provide 24 gauge plaster shields to protect reinforced points of frames in poured concrete walls.

7. Prepare frames for silencers. Drill three holes in strike jamb of single-leaf openings.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Preparation: Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, grease, and other impurities. Grind smooth edges, welds, and

rough spots.

B. Exterior Frames: After fabrication, touch up abraded galvanizing, chemically etch, and apply one baked-on

prime coat.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify proper coordination of frames with doors and hardware.

B. Examine door frames for damage, defects, and suitability for intended use.

C. Examine wall locations and verify following:

1. Correctness of dimensions, backing, or support conditions.

2. Absence of defects that would adversely affect frame or door installation.

D. Replace with good material any part or item found damaged, defective, or inadequate before installation.

E. Correct unacceptable conditions before proceeding with installation.

F. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install frames in accordance with the requirements of the specified frame grade and ANSI A250.11.

B. Install frames in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer’s data, except where requirements that

are more stringent are specified herein.

C. Touch up damaged factory finishes



Steel Frames

08 12 13 - 4

D. Protect frames from damage to surface or profile.



Steel Frames

08 12 13 - 5

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8 inch measured with straight edges, corner to corner.

3.4 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Replace, rework, or otherwise make good as required frames found defective as follows:

1. Items broken, damaged, disfigured, or defaced.

2. Incomplete, misaligned, or incorrectly located items.




Wood Doors

08 14 00 - 1

SECTION 08 14 00 - WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of wood doors of types noted and installation of their hardware.


1. Furnishing of door hardware.

2. Provision of field finishing of wood doors.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate details with other work supporting or adjoining wood doors.

2. Coordinate Work with door opening construction, frames, door, and hardware installation.

B. Scheduling:

1. Deliver wood doors only after proper facilities are available.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

B. Shop Drawings: Show each door indicating door elevations, hardware locations, dimensions, door and core

types, swings, undercuts required, and factory machining criteria for hardware.

C. Samples:

1. Wood illustrating species and grain, minimum 6 inches square.



A. Prior to delivery to site, identify each door with individual opening number to permit installation at correct

location.

B. Pack wood doors individually in heavy polyethylene bags and then corrugated cardboard containers. Provide

additional protection for corners and vertical edges. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

C. Deliver, store, and handle items to prevent damage or deformation.

D. Accept doors on site and inspect for damage.

E. Storage and Protection:

1. Provide clean, dry surfaces and flat platforms as required, and protect from deterioration, foreign

matter, weather, and exposure to the sun.

2. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week.

3. Store delivered wood doors in clean, safe, dry area.

4. Do not store on ground.

5. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or areas where sunlight might bleach veneer.



Wood Doors

08 14 00 - 2

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s written one year warranty providing for replacing, including cost of rehanging and

refinishing, at no cost to Owner, wood door exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD DOORS

A. Description:

1. Wood: Mahogany..

2. Stiles: 5-5/16 inches.

3. Top Rail: 5-3/16 inches.

4. Bottom Rail: 8-15/16 inches.

5. Panels: Solid lumber, edge glued.

6. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

7. Construction:

a. Cope and stick joinery with 1/2 inch by 4-1/4 inch dowels.

b. Type 1 marine grade waterproof glue.

c. Panels float to allow for expansion and contraction due to humidity changes. Apply caulking

between sticking and panel to prevent water intrusion.

B. Product: Architectural Traditions’ “Refined Traditional Model 2011 Ext”; or equal.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Preparation:

1. Verify frame details; obtain reviewed hardware schedule, templates, and other information.

2. Verify size, and design of each opening.

B. Bevel both stile edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches.

C. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.

D. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements according to templates.

Do not machine for surface hardware.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

B. Examine receiving frames and reviewed hardware schedule to verify proper coordination with doors.

C. Replace with good material any part or item found damaged, defective, or inadequate before installation.

D. Correct unacceptable conditions before proceeding with installation.

E. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.



Wood Doors

08 14 00 - 3

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood doors in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer’s data, except where more

stringent requirements are specified herein.

B. Install doors at correct openings; assure smooth swing and proper closure with frame.

C. Install wood doors plumb and square.

D. Hang doors to obtain free swinging operation without binding, sticking, or sagging. Maintain proper

clearances between door and frame.

E. Hardware: Install in accordance with “Standards for Installation” Article of Section 08 71 00 – Door

Hardware.

F. Where installation requires on-site cutting, reseal surfaces cut.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement and correct swinging, closing, and latching. Lubricate

or wax hardware and moving parts as required.

3.4 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Replace, rework, or otherwise make good as required, doors or finish hardware found defective as follows:

1. Items broken, damaged, disfigured, or defaced.

2. Incomplete, misaligned, or incorrectly located items.

3. Doors that will not hang in any position without moving when opened.

4. Where damages are in excess of repairs, which may be required by touch up process.




Door Hardware

08 71 00 - 1

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Furnishing and installing finish door hardware.

2. Furnishing templates.

3. Furnishing hardware list.



1. ANSI A156.13 - American Standard for Mortise Locks and Latches.

2. ANSI A156.18 - Materials and Finishes.

B. CBC - 2010 California Building Code.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Requirements:

1. Intent is provision of all required items of door hardware.

2. Hardware shall be made to template.

B. All hardware shall meet requirements of CBC Sections 1008.1.8 and 1133B.2.5.1.

C. Closers shall have following maximum pressure for opening doors.

1. Exterior Doors: 5 pounds pressure.

D. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 1133B.2.4.1.


A. Coordination: Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacturer or fabrication of

internal reinforcement for door hardware and recessed items.

1. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,

function, and finish of hardware.

2. Coordinate door hardware work with other directly affected sections involving manufacturer or

fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware and recessed items.

3. Provide necessary copies of templates or actual hardware as required ensuring proper preparation of

doors and frames.

4. Provide necessary copies of schedules and templates to necessary trade supplying materials to be

prepped for door hardware in ample time to avoid fabrication and construction delays.

5. Coordinate mounting heights with door and frame manufacturers.

6. Coordinate reinforcing units provided by door and frame manufacturers with by hardware supplier

and hardware manufacturer.

7. Coordinate Owner’s keying requirements during course of Work.



Door Hardware

08 71 00 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each door hardware item, furnish manufacturer’s product information including parts list.

B. Door Hardware Schedule:

1. Submit door hardware schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where acceptance of hardware

schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames) which is critical in the

project construction schedule.

2. Door hardware schedule to included detailed list of each hardware item, quantity, manufacture, and

model number, function, size as applicable, hardware finish, and fastenings.

3. Door hardware schedule to include door handing and degree of opening, door and frame sizes and

materials, and other pertinent information.

4. Door hardware schedule to include explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, similar

contained in schedule.


D. Templates: Furnish hardware schedule and templates to Contractor for distribution to necessary trades

supplying materials to be prepped for door hardware.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring

special attention.

1.6 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component

B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer

C. Deliver materials to Owner’s designated storage place, unload, and position in place per Owner’s instructions.

D. Provide Owner with a signed receipt indicating materials and quantities upon delivery


A. Marking and Packaging:

1. Properly mark and package hardware items according to reviewed hardware schedule, complete with

necessary screws and accessories, instructions and installation templates.

2. Clearly label and identify each package with door opening code to match final hardware schedule.

3. No keys, other than constructions master keys are to be packaged in boxes with locks.

B. Delivery: Hardware supplier shall deliver all hardware to Project site; direct factory shipments are all allowed

unless agreed upon beforehand.

C. Storage: Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control

handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of

the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers' catalog numbers are used herein to establish type, series, operation, and quality desired;

substitutions of equal products will be permitted only where invited.



Door Hardware

08 71 00 - 3

B. Furnish each type of door hardware with accessories as required for applications indicated and for complete,

finished, operational doors.

C. Fastenings: Furnish fastenings of sufficient quantity, suitable size and type for heavy use and long life and as

recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required to secure hardware. Following guidelines should be

adhered to for fasteners and anchors:

1. Finish: Exposed portions of fasteners and anchors shall match hardware item being fastened.

2. Provide sex bolts, toggle bolts, or other anchors as recommended by hardware manufacturer

according to material to which hardware is applied. Provide sex bolts for door closers attached to

wood doors.

3. Exposed Screw Heads: Phillips head type, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Use machine screws for hardware applied to metal.

5. Install hardware fastened to concrete or masonry with machine screws and “Star” type double

expansion shields, or for screw sizes less than 1/4 inch, fasten with wood screws and Phillips “Red

Head” Plastic Anchors, Fastway Extruded Vinyl Anchors, or “Star” Plastic Anchors , or equal. Do not

use lead shields or tampins.

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE ITEMS

A. Hinges:

1. Hinges shall display following characteristics:

a. Entire length of hinge pin shall be circumferenced with a continuous machined surface on

ball bearing hinges.

b. Swaging of the hinge shall not be in contact with hinge pin on a ball bearing hinge.

c. All hinges shall have five knuckles.

d. All ball bearings shall be completely concealed without the use of ferrules or sleeves.

e. All bearings and raceways shall be stainless steel.

f. Hinge size shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer’s published

recommendations. Size shall be sufficient to clear trim projection.

g. Exterior outswinging doors shall have non-removable pins.

2. Manufacturers: Hager Companies; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.; McKinney Products Co.; or

equal.

B. Locksets:

1. Mortise Locksets:

a. Description: All mortise locksets shall display the following characteristics:

1) Mortise locksets shall meet requirements of ANSI A156.13 Series 1000 Grade 1.

2) Backset: 2-3/4 inches.

3) Locksets shall have standard spacing between cylinders, thumb-pieces, and spindle.

4) Locksets shall have mechanical anti-friction device.

5) Locksets shall be reversible in the field.

6) Locksets shall be changeable in the field without changing case.

b. Product: Schlage Lock Co.'s “L Series, 18 Design, N Escutcheon”; or equal.

2. Miscellaneous Locksets: Manufactured by Schlage Lock Co.,; or equal.

3. Standard Cylinders:

a. Cylinders to have interchangeable cores.

b. Use same keyway for all cylinders.

c. Cylinders shall have six pins.

4. Strikes:

a. Provide wrought box strike for all locks, latches, and deadbolts.

b. Provide lip of strike with proper length for jamb detail and to protect trim from marring by

latch bolt.

c. Strike to be curved unless otherwise indicated.

d. Coordinate strike requirements with lockset type and metal frames.



Door Hardware

08 71 00 - 4

C. Modern Closers:

1. Description: All modern closers shall display the following characteristics:

a. Hydraulically controlled full rack and pinion in operation with separate noncritical

adjustable regulation for general closing speed, latching speed, backcheck control and spring

power.

b. Adhere to manufacturer's recommended schedule of sizes unless otherwise noted.

2. Manufacturers: LCN Closers; Norton Door Controls; Sargent Manufacturing Co.; or equal.

D. Threshold:

1. All thresholds must have a reinforcing center leg. Single length for each opening. Cut ends to match

jamb profile.

2. Manufacturers: Pemko Manufacturing Co.; Zero International Inc.; Reese Enterprises, Inc.; or equal.

E. Weatherstripping Manufacturers: Pemko Manufacturing. Co.; Zero International Inc.; Reese Enterprises, Inc.;

or equal.

F. Mute (Silencer) Manufacturers: Rockwood Mfg. Co.; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc. (Trimco); Ives;

or equal.

2.3 FINISHES

A. All hardware finishes shall conform to ANSI A156.18 product standards, materials, and finishes. Typical

hardware finish shall be satin stainless steel finish.

B. Door closers to match hardware finish.

2.4 KEYING

A. The hardware supplier shall spend whatever time is required with Owner to obtain his requirements and

properly lay out complete key schedule for approval.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors, door frames, and hardware for damage, defects, and suitability for intended use.

B. Verify door and frames are ready to receive door hardware and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings

and as instructed by manufacturer.

C. Verify that building is secured and free from weather elements prior to installing interior door hardware.

D. Replace with good material any part or item found damaged, defective, or inadequate before installation.

3.2 STANDARDS FOR INSTALLATION

A. Install door hardware in accordance with manufacturer's templates and instructions.

B. Install door hardware at heights indicated on the Drawings unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting height of latching hardware shall be 30 to 44 inches above finished floor surface per CBC

Section 1133B.2.5.2.

C. Floor stops shall not be located in path of travel and 4 inches maximum from walls (Policy 99-08).



Door Hardware

08 71 00 - 5

D. Screws shall be screwed, not driven into place.

E. Do not install surface-mounted hardware until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

F. Fitting: Accurately and properly fit door hardware. Securely fasten fixed parts for smooth, trouble-free,

nonbinding operation; fit faces of mortised parts snug and flush; operating parts shall move freely and smoothly

without binding, sticking or excessive clearance.

G. Ensure door hardware displays no evidence of finish paint after final building clean up with exception of

prime-coated door hardware installed for finish painting. Contractor may achieve this by sequencing

installation, removing after fitting and reinstalling after painting is completed, providing protection, cleaning to

original hardware finish or other approved means.

H. Latch and Bolt: Install latch and bolt to automatically engage in keeper, whether activated by closer or by

manual push; in no case shall additional manual pressure be required to engage latch or bolt in keeper.

I. Closers:

1. Adjust closer delay and operating speeds to comply with requirements of CBC Section 1133B.2.5 and

Americans with Disabilities Act Architectural Guidelines, Article 4.13.10.

2. Adjust sweep period of door closers so that from an open position of 70 degrees, door will take at

least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from that latch, measured to leading edge of door.

3. Mount closers for 180 degrees swing wherever possible. Supply drop plates at narrow top rail doors.

4. Carefully adjust closers to operate noiselessly and evenly.

J. As required during progress of work, remove and reset doors and hardware for installation of work of other

trades.

K. After work has been otherwise completed, examine hardware in place for complete and proper installation.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of

every unit.

B. Lubricate bearing surfaces of moving parts and adjust latching and holding devices for proper function; adjust

door control devices for speed and power; test keys for proper conformance with keying system.

C. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

D. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or

occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and

make final check and adjustment of all hardware items as necessary. Restore proper function and finish of

hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and

ventilating equipment

3.4 CLEANING

A. Completely remove protective materials and devices and thoroughly clean exposed surfaces of hardware; check

for surface damage prior to final cleaning for Owner's acceptance of Project.

3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 76 00 - Protecting Installed Construction.



Door Hardware

08 71 00 - 6

B. Protect door hardware from damage or marring of finish during construction; use strippable coatings,

removable tapes or other approved means.

C. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or hardware finish.

3.6 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Replace, rework or otherwise make good any hardware found defective as follows:

1. Unauthorized substitutes.

2. Hardware broken, damaged, disfigured, or defaced

3. Hardware delivered with missing, broken, damaged or defaced parts.

4. Hardware of incorrect hand or function.

5. Incomplete, misaligned, or incorrectly located hardware.

3.7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

GROUP NO. 1 - Each door to have:

3 Hinges Hager BB1191, 4-1/2 by 4-1/2

1 Cylinder Schlage type as required

1 Deadlock Schlage L464

1 Mortise Privacy Lock with Schlage L9496 with L583-363 “EZ” Turn

“OCCUPIED” indicator

1 Modern Closer, Parallel Arm LCN 4040XP CUSH

with Built-In Stop

3 Mutes Rockwood 608

1 Door Bottom (Shoe) Pemko 209

1 Threshold As noted on Drawings.

GROUP NO. 2 - Each door to have:

3 Hinges Hager BB1191, 4-1/2 by 4-1/2

1 Cylinder Schlage type as required

1 Mortise Storeroom Lockset Schlage L9080

1 Modern Closer, Parallel Arm LCN 4040XP CUSH

with Built-In Stop

1 Gasket at Head and Jambs Pemko S88D

3 Mutes Rockwood 608

1 Automatic Door Bottom Pemko 434 RL

1 Threshold Pemko 175SS




Glazing

08 80 00 - 1

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of exterior glass and glazing.



1. ANSI Z97.1 - Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Glazing Materials Used in

Buildings).


1. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and

Uncoated Glass.

2. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.

C. Glass Association of North America:

1. GANA - Glazing Material.

2. GANA - Sealant Manual.

3. GANA - Laminated Glass Design Guide.

D. South Coast Air Quality Management District:

1. SCAQMD Rule #1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Glass: Provide structural, physical, and environmental characteristics, size limitations, and special

handling or installation requirements.

2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds, and Accessories: Provide chemical, function, and environmental

characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors where exposed.

B. Samples:

1. Glass: 12 by 12 inch sample of each glass types specified. Identify all samples with types of glass

and thicknesses/

2. Other samples as requested.

C. Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificates: Certify laminated glass, meets or exceeds specified requirements.


A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, and GANA Laminated

Glass Design Guide for glazing installation methods.


A. Deliver, store, and handle materials in manner to prevent damaging.

B. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers bearing manufacturer’s name.



Glazing

08 80 00 - 2

C. Deliver glass affixed with manufacturer’s labels and do not remove labels prior to installation, inspection, or

final approval.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS TYPES

A. Type GL-1, Patterned Tempered Laminated Glass:

1. Outer Lite: Clear tempered glass with acid-etched finish on surface two, 1/4 inch thick.

2. Inner Lite: Clear tempered glass, 1/4 inch thick.

3. Interlayer: As required to achieve required design.

4. Overall Thickness: 1/2 inch.

5. Product: Guardian SunGuard’s “SatinDeco Lami”; or equal.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Safety Glass: Conform to ANSI Z97.1, minimum thickness 1/4 inch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clear Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A uncoated surfaces, Type 1

transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select.

2. Clear Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172.

a. Outer Lite: As indicated in Glass Types.

b. Innerlayer: As indicated in Glass Types

c. Inner Lite: As indicated in Glass Types.

d. Overall Thickness: As indicated in Glass Types.

2.3 GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Sealant: Sealants to have maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule

#1168.

1. Typical:

a. Description: One-part silicone type, neutral cure.

b. Product: Dow Corning Corp.’s “795 Silicone Building Sealant”; General Electric Co.’s

“Silpruf Sealant Series SCS-2000”; or equal.

B. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864, neoprene with 85 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness or silicone with 85 Shore A

durometer hardness.

C. Spacers, Spacer Shims, Shims, and Wedges: ASTM C864, neoprene, 50-75 Shore A durometer hardness.

D. Pressure Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device, 10 to 15 Shore A

durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.

E. Foam Plastic Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides,

maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent, designed for compression of 25 percent to effect an air

barrier and vapor retarder seal.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Provide polished and eased exposed glass edges.



Glazing

08 80 00 - 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine glass and openings to receive glass and verify that.

1. There are no defects that would affect glass and glazing work.

2. Openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

3. Surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture

movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.

4. Rivets, screws, bolts, welding fillets, or other projections from clearances in glazing rabbets have

been removed.

B. Do not start glazing until defects have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure receiving surfaces are clean and dry. Prevent formation of condensation.

B. Remove dust and oil from glass by wiping clean immediately before installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION


1. Perform installation in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and reviewed Shop Drawings.

2. Cut and set glass to full fit and play consistent with expansion and contraction requirements and for

absolute security under maximum high velocity wind or vacuum stresses.

3. Maintain edge clearance at least equal to glass thickness from perimeter of glass to inside of rabbet.

4. Maintain minimum 1/8 inch clearance between faces of glass and adjacent stop or bead.

5. Provide setting blocks at sill to transmit wind loads from glass to sash. Provide shims at head and

jambs at shop-glazed units.

6. Accurately size and cut clean for each glazing condition. Do not nip edges.

B. Laminated Glass:

1. Protect vinyl at edges against oil, water, or solvent.

2. Provide setting blocks under glass.

3. Apply protective tape to glass edges if recommended by glass manufacturer.

4. Apply protective tape to glass edges if recommended by glass manufacturer.

5. In all other respects, follow approved manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Sealant Application:

1. Neatly tool sealant or compound joints to compress material and improve adhesion. Repair air

pockets exposed by tooling.

2. Meet requirements of Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants unless otherwise indicated.

3. Ensure removal of protective coatings from aluminum surfaces.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

B. Remove labels, paint spots, and other defacements such that work is clean for Owner’s final acceptance.

C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.



Glazing

08 80 00 - 4

3.5 PROTECTION

A. After installation, mark pane with an “X” by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat

absorbing or reflective glass units.

B. Protect installed glass or acrylic plastic sheet against breakage, damage from plaster, sandblasting, welding

spatter, or other sources.




Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board

09 22 00 - 1

SECTION 09 22 00 - SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Provision of non-structural metal framing and accessories at interior locations.

2. Provision of backing plates for items adjoining or fastening to these systems unless otherwise noted.

3. Provision of miscellaneous metal items for attaching stud framing to structure.


1. Provision of collateral materials including accessories and fasteners.





2. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.


A. Metal studs and furring for vertical and horizontal surfaces:

1. Shall provide plumb, true, straight, and rigid framing for support of collateral materials.

B. Allowable Tolerances:

1. For flat surfaces, the maximum deviation from true plumb or level plane, 1/8 inch in 10 feet as

measured under straight edge placed at any location on surface.

C. Interior Wall Systems:

1. Design to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint sealant, undue stress

on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature

ranges.

2. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members,

clearances of intended openings.


A. Coordination: Coordinate details and requirements of other work that adjoins or fastens to metal studs or

furring and requires backing or special support framing included in this Section.

1. Coordinate installation of anchors, blocking, electrical work, and mechanical work which is to be

placed by others in or behind partition framing. Allow such items to be installed after framing is

complete.

2. Items requiring backing or support include, but are not necessarily limited to, casework, wall-mounted

finish hardware, miscellaneous specialties, handrail brackets, and similar items.

3. Obtain Architect’s approval of backing method proposed to satisfy requirements that differ from

methods indicated or shown.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:




09 22 00 - 2



A. Deliver and store materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and name of

manufacturer or supplier for whom product is manufactured with seals unbroken and labels intact until time for

use.

B. Notify manufacturer of damaged materials received prior to installing.

C. Provide support so that material is not in direct contact with ground.

D. Provide adequate support to prevent bowing of framing members prior to installation.

E. Store framing members at slight angle to allow drainage of moisture.

F. Inspect material before installing to determine its suitability for the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Metal Studs: : C-shaped sections cold formed with punched webs and 1-5/8 inch plain or perforated flanges to

receive screws; fabricated from 20 gage steel meeting requirements of ASTM A653/A653M with minimum

yield point of 50,000 psi and with G-60 galvanized coating.

B. Runner Tracks: Formed from 20 gauge steel meeting requirements of ASTM A653/A653M with minimum

yield point of 50,000 psi and with G-60 galvanized coating.

C. Backing Plates: Gauges, configurations, and sizes as indicated on Drawings. Material to meet requirements of

ASTM A653/A653M and with G-60 galvanized coating.

D. Fasteners:

1. Sheet Metal Screws: Self-drilling and self-tapping, flat pan head screws, No. 8 unless otherwise

noted. ITW Buildex’s “Hi-Lo and S-12 Fasteners”; The Rawlplug Co., Inc.’s “Rawl Self-Drilling

Screws”; United States Gypsum Co.’s “USG Screws, Type S-12 Pan Head”; or equal.

2. Concrete Screws:

a. Description: Heat-treated screws with unique Hi-Lo thread design that cuts threads in pre-

drilled holes in concrete.

b. Product: ITW Buildex’s “Tapcon Anchors”; The Rawlplug Co., Inc.’s “Tapcon Fasteners”;

United States Gypsum Co.’s “HWH Tapcon Anchors”; or equal.

3. Powder Driven Fasteners: Tempered steel pins, minimum 0.145 inch (3.6 mm) diameter, with special

corrosive-resistant plating or coating. Pins shall have guide washers to accurately control penetration,

minimum 1-1/4 inches unless otherwise noted. Fastening shall be accomplished by low-velocity

piston-driven powder-actuated tool. Pins and tool shall be same as manufactured by Hilti Inc.; ITW

Ramset.; or approved equal.

4. Expansion Anchors Wedge and sleeve type as noted. Hilti, Inc.’s “Kwik-Bolt 3Concrete Expansion

Anchors and Hilti Drop-In Anchors”; ITW Redhead’s “Trubolt Wedge Anchors and Multi-Set II

Anchors”; or equal.

E. Galvanized Finish Touch-Up Coating:

1. Description: Liquid zinc compound that bonds electrochemically to iron, steel and aluminum.

2. Product: ZRC Worldwide’s “Galvilite”; Southern Coatings & Chemical Co., Inc., Kenco Div.’s

“Galvicon Cold Galvanizing Compound”; or equal.




09 22 00 - 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive metal support systems and verify that:

1. Supporting substrates and abutting framing are in compliance with requirements, including

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of framing members.

2. Bearing surfaces and supporting structures are ready to receive the work.

3. Work by other trades is complete and accurate to the point where installation of the framing can

begin.

4. Field measurements are as indicated in Drawings. Notify in writing of any deviation between the

drawings and actual conditions prior to starting work.

5. Conditions are ready to receive work.

6. Rough-in utilities are in proper location.

B. Immediately notify of any discrepancies in the work, on Drawings or in the specification that will interfere

with the work.

C. Correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work.

D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents, the manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations, and reviewed Shop Drawings.

B. Install framing to support the design loads and to accommodate movement of the primary building structure

and clearances of intended openings.

C. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, in

accordance with the Contract Documents and ASTM C754.

D. Securely fasten framing members together and to walls, floors, and other structural supports.

E. Fasten framing members by welding or screws. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

F. Do not splice framing members, except tracks in non-axial-load bearing walls.

G. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

1. Exception: plasma cutting shall be permitted.

2. Cut framing members square for attachment to perpendicular members.

H. Do not bridge building expansion joints and control joints with framing members; frame both sides of joints

independently.

I. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, closure

pieces, clip angles, hold-down angles, stud girts, anchors and fasteners to provide complete and proper

framing system.

J. Where assembly procedures remove galvanizing, clean area of any foreign matter by wire brushing and/or

metal conditioner recommended by galvanized finish touch-up manufacturer. Apply galvanized touch-up

coating by brush or spray with a minimum coverage of 1.5 mils, dry-film.




09 22 00 - 4

K. Installation Tolerances:

1. Variation From Plumb, Level, and True to Line: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.

2. Variation From Plan Location of Individual Framing Members: Plus/minus 1/8 inch, with

cumulative error not more than minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finish

materials.

3.3 STUD PARTITION ERECTION

A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C754.

B. Deflection Allowance:

1. Where partitions abut underside of rigid construction cut studs short and do not rigidly attach to

runner track.

2. Where partitions abut concrete vertical surfaces, set end stud free of abutting surface and secure ends

of horizontal stiffeners in partition to abutting surface.

C. Cut Studs: If stud web is cut more than 50 percent or stud flange is cut to any degree, restore stud to original

strength to Architect’s satisfaction by welding, screwing, or wire-tying on steel reinforcement.

D. Runner Track:

1. Accurately align floor and ceiling runner track.

2. Secure with 1/4 inch diameter expansion bolts, powder driven fasteners at least 1 inch long may be

used, where permitted by code.

3. Space fasteners maximum 24 inches on center and 4 inches from each end.

4. Minimum of two fasteners per piece of runner.

E. Studs:

1. Space studs maximum 16 inches on center unless otherwise noted.

2. Secure studs to runner track.

3. Locate studs maximum 2 inches from opening jambs, abutting partitions or other construction.

4. At partition corners use minimum of three studs, position one stud to form outside corner and locate

another stud within 2 inches from inside corner along each partition, unless otherwise noted.

F. Install metal backing plate for support of wall mounted items. Install metal backing as indicated on Drawings.




Tiling

09 30 00 - 1

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of tile work including tile materials, cementitious backer units,

setting materials, grouting materials, and miscellaneous materials.


A. American National Standards Institute Inc.’s:

1. ANSI A108.1C - Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile Using A108.1A – or – A108.1B.

2. ANSI A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland

Cement Mortar.

3. ANSI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework.

4. ANSI A108.11 - Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.

5. ANSI A118.3 - Chemical-Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water-

Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive.

6. ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

B. ASTM International (ASTM).


2. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.

3. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

4. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

5. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases.

C. Tile Council of North America, Inc.

1. TCNA - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation.


A. Design Criteria: Tile work shall be clean and durable; no discolored or crumbling joints or cracks should

develop. Correct to Architect’s satisfaction above conditions which occur within warranty period.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

B. Verification Samples:

1. Full size sample for review of each color selected of each tile material specified.

2. Samples of each tile grout color selected.


C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with

dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.

D. Certification of the installer’s qualifications.



Tiling

09 30 00 - 2

E. Maintenance Instructions:

1. Submit manufacturer’s recommended maintenance instructions for each type tile installed, including

maintenance procedures, maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.

2. Include precautions to be taken against materials and methods that may be detrimental to resilient

flooring finish.

3. Submit copy of receipt for maintenance materials.

4. Maintenance data to be included in the Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 77 00 -

Project Closeout.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Extra Materials: Furnish to Owner two percent of each type and color of tile and trim material installed in this

Project from same lot or production run for compatibility with the installed materials.

B. Provide in securely wrapped packages, or factory sealed packing, with the manufacturer’s standard labels and

the material and color designation used in the Contract Documents.


D. Provide Owner with a signed receipt indicating materials and quantities upon delivery.


A. Perform Work in accordance with TCNA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/ANSI A118 Series.

B. Material Source: Furnish each type, finish, and color of tile product and accessory materials from one

manufacturer.

C. Installer: Company with not less than 20 installations of tile work similar in size and complexity to the

work of this project.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of

use.

B. Store and protect materials in compliance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

C. Protect adhesives and grout from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer’s printed

instructions.

D. Do not open containers or remove labels until materials have been inspected and accepted.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Ambient Conditions:

1. Maintain temperature not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit during installation.

2. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.



Tiling

09 30 00 - 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE MATERIALS

A. Wall Tile: As indicted on Drawings.

B. Floor Tile: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Trim: Same type, color, thickness, face size, and finish as adjacent tile.

1. Bullnose tile as indicated on Drawings.

2.2 TILE BACKER BOARDS

A. Cementitious Backer Units (Cement Board):

1. Description: 1/2 inch thick board, consisting of expanded shale, light weight concrete core and

reinforced with fiber glass mesh and high density

2. Product: National Gypsum Co.’s “PermaBase Brand Cement Board”; United States Gypsum Co.’s

“Durock Cement Board”; or equal.

B. Screws: ASTM C1002, self-drilling and self-tapping steel screws as recommended by cementitious backer

units manufacturer for steel framing, length to suit application

C. Joint Tape: Two inch wide, glass-fiber open-weave tape for joints and corners.

D. Joint Compound: As recommended by cementitious backer units manufacturer

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Underlayment:

1. Description: Trowel grade latex mastic underpayment of polymer modified cementitious filler.

2. Product: Mer-Kote Products, Inc.’s “Mer-Krete Underlayment-C”; or approved equal.

B. Portland Cement Mortar Bed Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.

2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206 or C207, Type S.

3. Sand: ASTM C144, washed clean and uniform in texture to pass 16 mesh screen.

4. Reinforcing: 2 by 2 inch, 16/16 gauge galvanized welded wire mesh.

C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar, Dry-Set:

1. Description: Latex additive to dry-set mortar, meeting requirements of ANSI A118.4.

2. Product: MAPEI Corp.’s “Planicrete 50 and Kerabond”; Laticrete International, Inc.’s “Laticrete

4237 and Laticrete 211”; Mer-Kote Products, Inc.’s “Mer-Krete Thin-Set 700”; or approved equal.

2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS

A. For Interior Tile:

1. Description: Epoxy type conforming to ANSI 118.3

2. Product: Mapei Corp.’s “Kerapoxy”; Bostik’s “Hydroment Color-Poxy”; Laticrete International,

Inc.’s “Laticrete SpectraLOCK Pro Grout”; or equal.

3. Color: As selected by Architect.



Tiling

09 30 00 - 4

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed closed-cell foam polyethylene or butyl rubber; minimum 1/8 inch to

maximum 1/4 inch width.

B. Expansion Joint Sealant: Multi-part polyurethane or mildew-resistant sealant including back-up and bond-

breaker materials necessary; certified by manufacturer as proper for purpose intended.

C. Acoustical Caulking:

1. Description: Permanently resilient, nonstaining type.

2. Product: The Tremco Mfg. Co.’s “Tremco Acoustical Sealant”; Pecora Corp.’s “AC-20 FTR

Acoustical Sealant”; or equal.

D. Water: Clean and potable, free from impurities detrimental to tile work.

E. Vapor Barrier: Four mil polyethylene film.

2.6 MIXES

A. Setting Bed Materials: Mix in accordance with applicable TCNA or ANSI Standards, or, where manufacturer

is cited, its recommendations.

B. Grouting Materials: Mix in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

C. Where latex additive is used in mortar, do not use water; use only compatible latex additive in grout with

proven history of minimizing efflorescence.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive tile and verify that:

1. Support systems are in proper alignment.

2. Blocking, bracing, and backing members of support systems are installed.

3. Surfaces are free of defects that would adversely affect tile work.

4. Surfaces are firm, level or plumb, dry, clean and free of oily or waxy film.

5. Inserts, accessories, plumbing, membranes, and similar items are placed or provided for.

6. There are no conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work.

B. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work.

C. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of In-Place Conditions: Protect surrounding work from damage before tile work begins.

B. Lay-Out:

1. Lay tile to pattern indicated.

2. Center fields and patterns on areas so that no tile is less than half size; locate cuts where least

conspicuous.

3. Unless noted otherwise, make joints in wall tile vertical and horizontal. Precisely locate expansion

joints and accessories before tile is installed.

4. Coordinate jointing in floor and wall tile whenever possible.



Tiling

09 30 00 - 5

5. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

6. Where heights of tile are stated in feet and inches and unless otherwise noted, maintain full courses

to nearest attainable height.

7. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimension indicated.

C. Preparation of Surfaces:

1. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

2. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler/

3. Otherwise conform to requirements corresponding to tile installation method specified below.

D. Illuminate the work area during installation, providing the same level and angle of illumination as will be

available for final inspection.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Set tile with uniform joints. Align joints both vertically and horizontally; no staggered joints will be permitted.

Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.

1. Set with uniform 1/4 inch wide joint unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cut and drill tile and trim shapes accurately without damage. Rub exposed cut edges smooth to bring edge of

glaze slightly back from body of tile.

C. Grind and fit tile carefully at intersections against trim finish and at built-in fixtures and accessories. Fit tile

closely around outlets, pipes, fixtures, and fittings so that plates, escutcheons, and collars overlap cuts.

D. Form internal angles as indicated on Drawings

E. Floor tile may be set either in full Portland cement mortar or in dry set mortar applied over Portland cement

mortar.

F. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without

interruptions.

1. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disruption of pattern or joint

alignment.

2. Terminate tile at centerlines of doors unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.

3.4 TILE BACKER BOARD

A. Cementitious Backer Units:

1. Install cementitious backer units where indicated on the Drawings.

2. Install cementitious backer units in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer’s printed

instruction unless indicated otherwise.

3. At walls, install vapor barrier prior to installing cementitious backer units

4. Provide 1/8 inch minimum gap between cementitious backer units.

5. Fill all joints and corners with tile setting mortar or adhesive and then immediately embed joint tape

and level the joints.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF WALL TILE IN DRY-SET PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR

A. Meet requirements of ANSI A108.5.



Tiling

09 30 00 - 6

B. Finish surface true, even, without waves, cracks, or imperfections. Limit surface tolerance to 5/16 inch in 10

feet with maximum inward and maximum outward allowance not occurring in less than 20 feet.

C. Do not add lightweight aggregates to dry-set mortar. Follow manufacturer’s directions exactly. Do not dilute

or extend mix with cement, admixtures, lime, flour, marble dust, or other fillers. Do not use any more water

than manufacturer recommends.

D. Firmly embed tile into dry-set mortar with finished surfaces brought to true and level planes. Use proper size

notched trowel to obtain nominal 1/8 inch bed thickness.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE IN PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR

A. Meet requirements of ANSI A108.1C.

B. Prevent rapid evaporation of moisture from mortar bed. Do not set tile on dry bed

C. Firmly embed tile into mortar with finished surfaces brought to true level planes or pitches as shown.

3.7 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Grouting of joints to meet requirements of ANSI A108.10.

B. Sealant-Filled Joints: Provide expansion, control, and isolation joints as recommended in the TCNA. Saw-

cut joints are unacceptable.

1. Expansion joint installation method: TCNA EJ 171.

2. Keep joints free of adhesive or grout.

3. Locate joints to coincide with control joints in substrate.

C. Allow at least 24 hours to elapse before grouting to permit solvents of adhesive material to escape.

D. Thoroughly brush and wash out joints; saturate with clean water before grouting where required.

E. Fill entire depth of joints with grout.

F. Grout square edge tile joints flush with face of tile making neatly finished smooth surface.

G. Grout joints of other than square edge tiles to full depth; then remove grout to expose modified edges.

H. Take precautions to prevent staining of grouted joints.

I. At wall outlets, pipes, and fittings, caulk with acoustical caulking. Do not grout.

J. Use expansion joint sealant at perimeter of tile field, at intersections with columns and posts, at maximum

dimension as indicated TCNA in both directions in large field areas, where noted, and where obstructions

occur; match color of sealant to pointing grout.

K. In all other respects, follow grout manufacturer’s recommendations exactly.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

B. Remove cement and grout stains in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Clean entire tile installation with neutral, non-alkaline chemical cleaner free from lye or caustics.



Tiling

09 30 00 - 7

1. Use of acid or acid containing cleaners will not be permitted.

2. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from the cleaning solvent.

D. Thoroughly scrub with water and burlap sacks; remove cement and grout stains in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Polish tile surfaces with soft cloth.

F. Apply penetrating sealer on unglazed ceramic floor tile in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed

directions; prevent damage to adjoining work from this operation.

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Protect installed Work under provisions of Section 01 76 00 - Protecting Installed Construction.

B. Protect adjoining work surfaces before tile work begins.

1. Prohibit traffic over floors for a minimum of seven days.

2. Remove protection, rinse, and dry tile installations before final review and acceptance.

C. Provide protection and maintain in an acceptable manner until Substantial Completion.

D. Prior to final acceptance, remove protective coverings and clean as specified herein.




Acoustical Insulation

09 81 00 - 1

SECTION 09 81 00 - ACOUSTICAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Provision of acoustical insulation and accessories.



1. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

2. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

B. Sample: Only as requested.


A. Deliver acoustical products only after glazing has been completed, exterior openings closed in, and wet work

completed and dried out.

B. Deliver and store packaged products in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of

use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION

A. Description:

1. Nonfaced, stone wool blanket made from basalt rock and slag and meeting requirements of ASTM

C665, Type I.

2. Thickness: Three inches.

3. Flame Spread (ASTM E84): Zero.

4. Smoke Development (ASTM E84): Zero.

B. Product: Roxul Inc.’s “Roxul Safe’n’Sound Insulation”; or equal.]

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation Support: String wire, staples, Plywood backing strips and nails as required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas to receive insulation for conditions that will adversely affect installation and performance.



Acoustical Insulation

09 81 00 - 2


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Place acoustical insulation full height in partitions, tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight in items passing through partitions.

1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If

printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's

technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work.

C. Install insulation to fit snugly between framing members and around pipes, conduits, and outlet boxes as

necessary to maintain integrity of insulation.

D. Butt ends of insulation closely together and fill all voids.

E. Allow air space between insulation and back of opposite cement board.]

F. Provide means to prevent displacement where required.

3.3 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Remove insulation in areas deemed defective and replace with new material conforming to requirements.

B. Restore to original condition work of other sections damaged in repair or replacement of defective work.

C. Remove or replace work damaged by weather.




Painting

09 91 00 - 1

SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preparation of surfaces scheduled to be painted.

2. Field application of painting metal door and window frames.

3. Field application of sealing exterior wood doors with “Restor-It’s” -Clear Penetrating epoxy Sealer

4. Work does not include painting following items, materials or spaces:

a. Mechanically finished nonferrous metals such as stainless steel, aluminum, and bronze,

except soft annealed stainless steel, copper, and exposed mechanical and electrical items.

b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment, including light fixtures, switchgear, and

distribution cabinets.

c. Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valves and damper

operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts.

d. Interior spaces specifically noted as unpainted.


1. Provision of corrosion proof maintenance and prime coating of items so noted, safety marking, or

identification painting of mechanical and electrical items.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Paint: Coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers, fillers, and other

applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.

B. Factory Finish: Factory-applied painting system consisting of primer and finish coats equal in quality to gloss

enamel system specified for ferrous metal under work of this Section.


A. California Department of Health Services:

1. CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from

Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda.

B. Green Seal:

1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.

2. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.

C. South Coast Air Quality Management District:

1. SCAQMD Rule #1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.


A. Scheduling:

1. Schedule installing products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize possibility

of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:



Painting

09 91 00 - 2

1. Submit copies of a complete list of materials, identified by manufacturer’s name and product label or

stock number.

2. Make list in the form of a repetition of painting systems specified, with the addition of the specified

product intended for each coat.

3. Manufacturer’s technical information, paint analysis, special surface preparation procedures, substrate

conditions requiring special attention, and application instructions for each proposed material.

4. Include manufacturer’s statement that components are appropriate to each painting system.

5. Include certifications by paint manufacture that products supplied comply with specified regulatory

requirements.

B. Color Samples: Submit Samples for review of color and sheen only, not texture or finish. Submit in sufficient

time to avoid delaying progress of work.

1. On 8-1/2 by 11 inch card, provide two Samples of each color and system specified with specified

coats cascaded, with texture to simulate actual conditions.

2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the project site.

C. Upon Architect’s request, furnish copies of invoice with quantities of materials purchased for Project.

D. Maintenance Instructions:

1. Submit manufacturer’s recommended maintenance instructions for each type of paint installed,

including maintenance procedures and materials.

2. Submit copy of receipt for maintenance materials.

3. Maintenance data to be included in the Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 77 00 -

Project Closeout.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Extra Materials: Furnish to Owner one gallon of each color and type installed in this Project.

B. Label each container with color, sheen, type, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer’s

standard label, and the material and color designation used in the Contract Documents.


D. Provide Owner with a signed receipt indicating materials and quantities upon delivery.


A. Employ coats and undercoats for all types of finishes in strict accord with the recommendations of the paint

manufacturer used unless otherwise specified in this Section. In case of conflict, comply with the most

stringent.

B. Regulatory Requirements: All painting materials shall comply with local, state, and federal Air Quality

mandates, codes, and regulations.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer’s name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage,

surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and

reducing.



Painting

09 91 00 - 3

C. Paint Materials: Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees Fahrenheit and

maximum of 90 degrees Fahrenheit, in well ventilated areas, unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s

printed instructions.

D. Store paint materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers.

1. Maintain containers used in storage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Keep storage area neat and orderly.

E. Remove all empty containers, waste, and rags from premises daily.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS


1. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges

required by the paint product manufacturer.

2. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the

humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

3. Apply paint under dry and dust-free conditions.

4. Maximize ventilation during application and drying.

B. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

C. Provide sufficient ventilation for application operations.

D. Isolate area of application from rest of building.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL

A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments:

1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous

coating.

2. For good flow and brushing properties.

3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:

1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart

D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or

other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:

1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds

(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl)

phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate,

dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury,

methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene

(methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS



Painting

09 91 00 - 4

A. Manufacturers: Provide the below listed products of the following manufacturers, or equal.

1. Benjamin Moore (BM)

2. Dunn-Edwards (DE).

3. Frazee Paint Co., A Comex Group Company (FP).

4. Kelly Moore (KM)

5. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W).

6. Restor-It (www.restor-it.com)

B. Materials:

Type BM DE FP KM S-W

100 Percent Acrylic Semi-Gloss 96 W901V 124 1250 B42

Finish

Ferrous Metal Primer (Acrylic) M04 W715 561 1725 B66W1

Galvanized Metal Primer (Acrylic) M04 W715 561 1725 B66W1

Epoxy Sealer: Restor-It’s “Clear Penetrating Sealer”; or approved equal.

C. Primers and Subsequent Coats: Provide primers and other undercoat paints produced by the same

manufacturer of finish coats or approved in writing by manufacturer of finish coat. Where primer is shop

applied to metal, subsequent costs may be products of another manufacture provided the coatings are mutually

compatible. Review other sections in which primers are provided to assure compatibility of the total systems

for various substrates.

D. Colors: Provide colors, and degree of luster as indicated. Color tint primers, sealers, and undercoats to

correspond with finish color. Vary color of successive coats sufficiently to distinguish between coats. Obtain

Architect’s approval for adjustments of color on job.

1. Colors: As selected by Architect.

2.3 ASSOCIATED MATERIALS

A. Thinner: Use only thinners by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, and other materials not specifically indicated, but

required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine receiving areas before application and verify that:

1. Receiving surfaces meet the requirements of product manufacturer.

2. Shop applied primer is compatible with subsequent cover materials.

3. Receiving surfaces are thoroughly dry, clean and in proper condition to assure adhesion and proper

functioning of coating specified.

B. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

C. Report in writing to Architect, with copy to the manufacturer, any deficiencies that could impair work.



Painting

09 91 00 - 5

D. Application of paint systems materials shall constitute acceptance of the surface, and shall obligate the

Contractor for such repair as necessary any unsatisfactory finish resulting.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Follow manufacturer’s instructions carefully to apply materials only to surfaces that are acceptable.

B. Surface Appurtenances: Prior to surface preparation and application operations, completely mask, remove,

or otherwise adequately protect hardware, accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and

similar items in contact with coated surfaces but not scheduled to receive coating.

C. Protect the adjacent and adjoining work and materials from damage from this work. If necessary, mask by

suitable covering or other methods, during application of the coating system.

D. Before applying coating system, thoroughly clean all surfaces involved to remove grease, oil and dirt or other

materials effecting bond. Schedule cleaning so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process

do not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.

E. Before application is started in any area, broom clean and remove excessive dust.

F. Clean, dry and adequately protect all surfaces from dampness. Surfaces shall be smooth, even, and true to

place, and free of any foreign material that will adversely affect adhesion or appearance of applied coating

system.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Shop-Primed Metal Substrates:

1. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.

2. Retouch abraded surfaces using same type of paint as primer.

3. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.

4. Clean surfaces with solvent.

5. Prime bare steel surfaces.

B. Galvanized Metal Substrates:

1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent as required to ensure adhesion of

primer.

2. Apply specified pretreatment.

3. Apply prime coat the same day as pretreatment is applied.

C. Marks: Seal with shellac those that may bleed through surface finishes.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with paint manufacturers’ printed instructions unless otherwise noted.

B. Do not reduce any material unless so directed by Architect, or unless recommended by materials manufacturer.

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless

otherwise approved.

E. Do not paint over code-required labels, equipment identification, performance rating, name, or

nomenclature plates.



Painting

09 91 00 - 6

F. Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying

next coat.

H. Paint to sharp, true lines and edges; when color change occurs in same plane, paint to chalk lines or tape.

I. Prime Coats:

1. Prime substrates the same day they are prepared.

2. Apply prime coat to material that is required to be painted or finished, and that has not been prime

coated by others.

3. Recoat primed and sealed substrates where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first

coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

4. Shop-Primed Metal Items: Field-applied prime coats may be confined to abraded areas requiring

touch-up.

J. Miscellaneous Painting: Surfaces to be painted and not specifically described herein shall be painted with a

product specifically manufactured or prepared for the material and surface; prime coat and two finish coats.

K. Completed Work: Match Architect’s control samples for color, texture, sheen, and coverage. Remove,

refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.

L. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate, to

establish a total dry film thickness.

M. Epoxy Sealer: Apply in accordance with manufacture’s recommendations.

N. Coverage:

1. Notwithstanding achievement of complete coverage with less than number of coats specified, apply

specified number of coats.

2. Where application of number of coats specified fails to achieve complete coverage, apply additional

coats as necessary.

O. Should any coat be deemed unsatisfactory, it shall be sanded and additional coats applied as necessary until

satisfactory finish is achieved.

P. Reinstall hardware, accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in contact

with coated surfaces that were removed prior to painting.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paints materials, rubbish, cans and rags at

end of each workday.

B. Upon completion of work, remove surplus materials and rubbish, and clean off spilled or splattered paint

resulting from this Work.

C. Washing Finished Surfaces:

1. Wash in accordance with manufacturer’s directions only where required to clean work.

2. Assure washing does not produce surface different from unwashed surface. Difference will be

considered unsatisfactory work.

3.6 PROTECTION



Painting

09 91 00 - 7

A. Protect work of others trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work.

B. Protect finished installation from damage until the project is accepted by Owner.

C. Provide “Wet Paint” signs as required to protect newly painted finish.

D. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion

of painting operations.

E. Clean, repair and recoat damaged surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions, as

acceptable to Architect, and at no increase in Contract Sum.

3.7 PAINTING SYSTEM SCHEDULES

A. The number of coats specified is the minimum number acceptable. If full coverage is not obtained with the

specified number of coats, apply additional coats as necessary to produce the required finish, at no increase

in Contract Sum.

B. Painting Systems:

1. Ferrous Metal, Shop-Primed or Prepainted - Typical, Acrylic Semi-Gloss Trim Enamel:

a. First Coat: Ferrous Metal Primer (Acrylic), color to match finish coat.

b. Second Coat: 100 Percent Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish.

2. Galvanized Metal - Typical, Acrylic Semi-Gloss Trim Enamel:

a. Pretreat Galvanized Metal with Jasco Prep N Prime Metal Pretreatment.

b. First Coat: Galvanized Metal Primer (Acrylic).

c. Second Coat: 100 Percent Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish.

d. Third Coat: Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish.

3. Wood Doors:

a. First Coat: Epoxy sealer.

b. Second Coat: Epoxy sealer.




Graffiti-Resistant Coatings 09 96 23 - 1

SECTION 09 96 23 - GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of graffiti-resistant coatings on exterior concrete surfaces.


A. Scheduling: Schedule and coordinate this work with other trades and do not proceed until other work and job

conditions are as required to achieve satisfactory results.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

B. Samples: Minimum 8-1/2 by 11 inches.

1. Material Samples: Show the number of coats of graffiti-resistant coating material on each substrate to

which the material is to be applied. Apply graffiti-resistant coating to the samples in setback

procedure, leaving exposed a portion of the substrate and subsequent portions of each coat.

C. Certificates: Certification of the applicator’s qualifications including technicians and required equipment.

D. Upon Architect’s request, furnish copies of invoice with quantities of materials purchased.


A. Applicator Qualifications:

1. Applicator of graffiti-resistant coating shall be licensed or otherwise certified by graffiti-resistant

coating manufacturer and shall have been regularly providing installations of the type required for not

less than three years and proving a background of not less than three years of installations of

comparable size to that herein specified.

2. Applicator’s technicians to be utilized for the application of graffiti-resistant coating material have

been trained by graffiti-resistant coating manufacturer.

3. Applicator must have specialized equipment as required by the coating system manufacturer to be

used in the application of graffiti-resistant coating.

B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: All graffiti-resistant coating materials used shall comply with Volatile

Organic Compound (VOC) environmental regulations for location of Project.

C. Mock-Up:

1. On site, apply graffiti-resistant coating to approximately 100 square feet to demonstrate method of

application of graffiti-resistant coating, complying with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Mock-up

preparation to confirm application speed/technique necessary to apply uniform, even coat while

avoiding over application.

2. Mock-up to ensure suitability and desired result of graffiti resistant coating.

3. Install graffiti resistant coating where directed by Architect to each type of surface scheduled to

receive coating.

4. Maintain mock-up as a standard of quality for all installations.





A. Deliver and store packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Labels to include

the following:

1. Name of manufacturer.

2. Product number.

3. Batch number.

4. Date of manufacturer.

5. Shelf life expiration date.

6. Color name and number.

7. Instructions for use.

8. Safety precautions.

B. Do not open containers or remove labels until materials have been inspected and accepted.

C. Store and protect accepted materials in accordance with manufacturer’s directions and recommendations.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements

1. Temperature: Do not apply graffiti-resistant coating when surface temperature is less than 40 degrees

Fahrenheit or more than 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Do not apply during rain showers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATING

A. Type 1, For Application on Exterior Concrete Surfaces:

1. Description:

a. Four coat system consisting of two base coats and two tops coats.

b. Clear, water-based non-sacrificial (permanent) coating for control of graffiti.

c. Coating to act as graffiti barrier by preventing spray paints, crayons, and ink from

penetrating and staining underlying surface.

d. Graffiti is removed from protected surfaces by companion cleaners. Cleaner should not

remove graffiti coating.

2. Product: Monopole Inc.’s “Permashield Base Coat and Permashield Premium Non-Sacrificial

Graffiti Control System”; or equal.

2.2 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Cleaners:

1. Product: Monopole Inc.’s “Citrus Clean”; or equal.

2. Quantity: Provide enough material to remove graffiti from 20 percent of the coated surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine receiving areas before application and verify that:

1. Receiving surfaces meet the requirements of graffiti-resistant coating manufacturer.

2. Receiving surfaces are thoroughly dry, clean and in proper condition to assure adhesion and best

performance.




B. Report in writing to Architect, with copy to the manufacturer, any deficiencies that could impair work.

C. Application of graffiti-resistant coating materials shall constitute acceptance of the surface, and shall

obligate Contractor for such repair as necessary any unsatisfactory finish resulting.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Follow graffiti-resistant coating manufacturer's instructions carefully to apply materials only to surfaces that

are acceptable.

B. Protect the adjacent and adjoining work and materials from damage from this work. If necessary, mask by

suitable covering or other methods, during application of the coating system.

C. Avoid wind drift to adjacent surfaces.

D. Thoroughly clean surfaces to remove grease, oil, mortar, plaster stains, and dirt or other material effecting

bond. After cleaning, allow rinse water to dry so surface appears dry and is absorbent. Most surfaces can

be coated 20 minutes to one hour after cleaning.

3.3 MATERIAL PREPARATION

A. Stir or mix material before use. Do not dilute or alter.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Apply graffiti-resistant coating materials in exact accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions as

required to achieve the appearance of the approved samples and specified performance.

B. Apply the number of coatings as recommended by graffiti-resistant coating manufacturer for the surface being

covered.

C. Spray surface lightly from top to bottom.

D. Apply using an overlapping horizontal spray pattern. Follow up with vertical stroke for deep vertical recesses.

Avoid flooding surface or creating heavy rundowns.

E. Concrete Surfaces:

1. Coverage rate will vary between 200-400 square feet per gallon, depending on surface texture and

porosity. Coverage will increase where additional coats are required.

2. Allow treatment to penetrate in one to two minutes. Remove buildups using damp bush or roller. Do

not allow material to buildup or collect at reveals in concrete. Do not let coating run or drip on

surfaces below reveals.

3. Allow previous coat to dry to touch (20 to 30 minutes). Lightly apply subsequent coats. Will dry

thoroughly in one to two hours.

4. Specified graffiti-resistant coating is formulated for spray application but may be applied with brush

or roller.


A. After surface is dry, inspect carefully to assure that sufficient material has been applied to create a continuous

light film across surface. If a continuous surface film cannot be detected, additional coat of material may be

required.




B. Arrange for inspections by manufacturer's representatives who shall ensure correct use and application of

graffiti-resistant coating.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of

each workday.

B. Upon completion of application, remove all surplus materials and rubbish, and clean off all spilled or splattered

materials resulting from this Work.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished installation from damage until the project is accepted by Owner.

B. Protect freshly coated surfaces from rain for two hours following application.

C. Clean, repair and recoat damaged surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, as

acceptable to Architect, and at no increase in Contract Sum.




Signage

10 14 00 - 1

SECTION 10 14 00 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of Public Toilet Room signage.


A. Coordination: Coordinate actual identifying device location with Architect

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

B. Samples: Only a requested.


A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this

Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce

sign units required without causing delay in the Work.


A. Deliver, store, and handle packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until

time of use.

B. Store delivered products and materials in clean, safe, and dry area.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PUBLIC TOILET ROOM SIGNS

A. Door Mounted Signs:

1. Description:

a. Type, shape, and size as indicated on Drawings.

b. Bronze material with black background

c. Signs to incorporate raised Grade 2 Braille symbols.

d. Provide with concealed mounting system.

2. Product: The Bronze Plaque’s “Models 121 and 122”; or equal.

B. Wall Mounted Signs:

1. Description:

a. Type, shape, and size as indicated on Drawings.

b. Bronze material with black background/

c. Signs to incorporate raised Grade 2 Braille symbols.

d. Provide with concealed mountings.

2. Product: The Bronze Plaque’s “Models 106 and 106”; or equal.



Signage

10 14 00 - 2

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions and Documents:

1. Notify Architect of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

2. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Review locations and installation methods for signage with Architect.

B. Remove dirt, dust, grit, grease stains, and foreign matter detrimental to application.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install signage in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Install signage plumb and level, accurately aligned, and securely mounted

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect exposed signage as required against construction damage until completion of construction.

B. Remove wrappers, covering, identifying stickers, paper, and other protective from the prior to Owner’s

acceptance of Project.

C. Remove and replace any damaged work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently

eliminate evidence of damage to satisfaction of Architect prior to Owner’s acceptance of Project.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Prior to final acceptance, clean all signage surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



Toilet Accessories 10 28 13 - 1

SECTION 10 28 13 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of toilet accessories. B. Related Work Not Included in this Section:

1. Provision of backing plates. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.

2. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with the placement of wall backing plates to receive anchor attachments. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Shop Drawings: Show methods of backing, installation, and fastening. C. Samples: Only as requested. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

Label shall identify accessory, catalog number, and finish. B. Store delivered products in clean, safe, dry area. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer’s catalog numbers cited below indicate design, quality, capacity, function, and finish desired.

Equivalent products of other manufacturers may be acceptable, if, in the judgement of [Architect,] they meet the intent of the specifications in terms of design, function, materials, and quality of workmanship.

2.2 COMPONENTS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors

and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.



B. Keys: Provide two keys for each accessory. Key all locks alike. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 stainless steel. E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type. 2.3 ACCESSORY LIST A. Feminine Napkin-Tampon Disposal:

1. Description: Recessed-mounted; self-closing panel to cover disposal opening. Constructed from stainless steel, type 304, satin finish. Flanges are one piece seamless. Doors to have full length stainless steel piano hinges and equipped with tumbler lock.

2. Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.’s “Model B-353”; or equal. B. Grab Bar:

1. Description: Horizontal gab bars, length as indicated on Drawings. 1-1/4 inch outside diameter, 18 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel tubing, satin finish; 90 degree return ends, swaged and heliarc welded to concealed mounting flanges. Flange covers to snap over mounting flanges to conceal mounting screws. Clearance between rail and wall shall be 1-1/2 inches.

2. Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.’s “Model B-5806 x 36”; or equal. C. Hand Dryer:

1. Description: Surface mounted warm air, rapid drying, energy efficient electric hand dryer; surface mounted; entire dryer internally grounded a. Controls: Completely sealed control assembly and optics for protection against moisture,

lint/dust and vandalism. Automatic, activated by infrared optical sensor. Operates while hands are under blower. Shut-off within 2 seconds when hands removed or in 35 seconds if hands not removed.

b. Cover: Stainless steel with brushed finish. c. Air Intake: Small circular Inlet openings on bottom of cover. a. Air Outlet: Delivers focused air stream of 18,000 LFM at nozzle and 16,000 LFM at

average hand position of 4 inches below air outlet. b. Wall Plate: Injection molded, rib reinforced plate with metal L brackets to attach cover,

with ten 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter holes for surface mounting to wall and three 7/8 inch (22 mm) diameter holes for electrical wiring; bottom hole suitable for surface conduit.

a. Electrical Service: Equip hand dryer for 110/120 volt, 12.5 amp and 60 Hz. 2. Product: Excel Dryer Inc.’s “Xlerator Hand Dryer Model XL-SB”; or equal.

B. Mirrors:

1. Description: Stainless steel construction with mirror surface with #8 architectural bright finish Mirror has /4 inch thick tempered masonite backing and 1.4 inch return on all for sided. Mirror size 18 by 42 inches.

2. Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.’s “Model B-1556”; or equal. C. Soap Dispenser, Liquid:

1. Description: Surface-mounted; individual type; capacity 40 fluid ounce; body shall be 20 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish; drawn, one piece seamless construction with vandal-resistant mounting, filler top and polycarbonate refill window. Valve shall have stainless mechanism with O-ring seals, chrome plated brass housing.

2. Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.’s “Model B-2111”; or equal.



D. Toilet Paper Dispenser, Single Jumbo Roll: 1. Description: Toilet tissue dispenser to accommodate one toilet tissue roll up to 10 inches in diameter

with a 2-1/8 diameter core roll or 1-5/8 inch diameter core roll by adding rubber o-rings. Caabinet door, 22 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, with a slot to reveal toilet tissue supply inside cabinet and tumbler lock.

2. Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.’s “Model B-2890”; or equal. E. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser:

1. Description: Recessed; single or half-fold, capacity 500; Type 302 stainless steel, satin finish, all welded construction. Flange shall be drawn, 1 piece seamless construction; door equipped with full length stainless steel piano hinge and tumbler lock.

2. Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.’s “Model B-301”; or equal. PART 2 EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Sections will be performed and verify that:

1. Backing not included in work of this section is correct. 2. Surfaces are dry, clean, free from foreign matter, and otherwise proper for installation. 3. Toilet compartments to receive accessories have been properly installed and correctly prepared. 4. That there are no conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. 5. Conditions are appropriate for installation of toilet accessories.

B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. C. Confirm exact location of accessories prior to installation. 2.3 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessories in accordance with approved manufacturer’s printed instructions and reviewed Shop

Drawings. B. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on Drawings. C. Install toilet accessories in their proper location, firmly anchored into position, level and plumb, D. Attach accessories securely with concealed fastenings unless otherwise noted; insure true alignment. E. Adjust accessories as required for correct operation. F. Installed grab bars shall withstand a minimum load or stress of 250 pounds point load applied at any point. END OF SECTION 10 28 13



Decomposed Granite Paving

32 15 16 - 1

SECTION 32 15 16 – DECOMNPOSED GRANITE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in this Section: Provision of decomposed granite paving.



1. ASTM C136 – Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

2. ASTM D2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate.

B. Greenbook – Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.


1. Coordination: Coordinate work specified in this Section with work specified in other Sections to minimize

cutting of and operation of heavy equipment over newly installed surfacing.

2. Sequencing: Do not install work specified in this Section prior to acceptance of earth moving.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

B. Certification that

1. Installer meets specified requirements.

2. Material meets specified requirements.

C. Samples:

1. Quart sample of crushed aggregate with admixture in color specified. in manufacturer’s

standard colors for selection. 2. Other Samples only as requested.


A. Installer’s Qualifications:

1. Installer to provide evidence to indicate successful experience in providing decomposed granite

surfacing containing specified admixture and / or ability to follow installation instructions.

2. Installed shall have at least 3 years experience in similar work.

B. Job Mockup:

1. Construct mockup of 20 square feet minimum of crushed aggregate blended with admixture

surfacing, including edging, at location approved by Architect. Build mockup seven days prior to

installation.

2. Intent of the mockup is to demonstrate surface finish, texture, color and standard of workmanship.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of mockup construction.

4. Allow Architect to view and obtain approval of mock-up before proceeding with rest of crushed

aggregate blended with admixture.

5. Approved mock-up may remain as first in place construction.




32 15 16 - 2


A. Deliver and store packaged products in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of

use.

B. Protect materials / aggregate from contamination with foreign matter. Store under waterproof

cover and protect from dampness.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not install crushed aggregate blended with admixture when sub-base is wet at saturated field capacity.

B. Do not install materials during rainy conditions or below 40 degrees Fahrenheit and falling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Decomposed Granite (Crushed Aggregate):

1. Decomposed granite shall have a 3/8 inch maximum gradation, produced from naturally friable

rock / granite with enough fines to produce a smooth walking surface. Materials should be free

from clay lumps, organic matter and deleterious material. Blends of coarse sand and rock dust are

not acceptable.

2. Use a single supply source for the entire quantity required.

3. Gradation, in accordance with ASTM C136:

Sieve Sizes % (Percent) Passing

3/8inch 100

#4 85-100%

#8 70-80%

#16 50-65%

#30 40-50%

4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

5. Supplier: Enz Vineyard Rock Quarry, Hollister California: or equal.

B. Admixture (Aggregate Binder):

1. Description: Combination of pre-consumer recycled aggregate, gypsum by-product, fine clays, and

colorant. Admixture is an all-natural product and does not contain oils, polymers, resins or

enzymes.

2. Product: GraniteCrete, Inc.’s “GraniteCrete”; or equal.

3. Color: As selected by Architect manufacturer’s standard range.

C. Water: Free from contaminants that would discolor or be deleterious to crushed aggregate blended

with GraniteCrete admixture surfacing.

D. Base Rock: Class II Base rock.

E. Stone Edging: Granite as indicated on Drawings.




32 15 16 - 3

2.2 MIXING

A. Mix decomposed granite, admixture, and water in accordance with admixture manufacture’s printed

instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine receiving surfaces and verify that surfaces are in proper condition for receiving decomposed granite

paving.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Excavation: Excavate to depth required so edges of crushed aggregate blended with GraniteCrete admixture

surfacing will match adjacent grades and have a maximum cross slope of 1 percent. Remove excavated soil

from site.

B. Sub-grade Preparation: Comply with Greenbook Section 301-1 – “Sub-grade Preparation.”

C. Base Course Installation: Comply with Greenbook Section 301-2 –“Untreated Base.”

D. Stone Edging: Install as indicated on Drawings.

E. Prior to installation, dampen surface on which installation is to occur.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install decomposed granite paving in accordance with specified manufacturer’s printed instruction. Do not

allow decomposed granite paving to dry during installation. Mist as necessary to maintain optimum

moisture content prior to compaction.

B. Grade and smooth to required elevation. Smooth out any final irregularities prior to substantial compaction.

Smooth by using the straight edge of an asphalt rake or a medium bristle broom over entire paving surface.

C. Compact: After optimum moisture content is achieved for compaction, thus achieving an 88 to 92 percent

compaction. Hand-tamp around benches, sign posts, corners, boulders, etc. Initially use a vibratory plate or

a 1-3 ton smooth double drum roller in static position. Follow with final compaction using a heavy lawn

roller to obtain the final desired dense, smooth, uniform finish.

D. Take care compacting adjacent to planting and irrigation systems.

E. Minimum Compacted Thickness: Install to depth shown on Drawings.

F. Cover finished surface, when practical, to achieve maximum curing period. See Section 3.5.

G. Minimum Compacted Thickness: As indicated on Drawings

H. Surface shall follow overall contours of landscape. Flat areas shall be sloped or crowned for drainage. Slope

2.0 percent minimum to drain away from structures.




32 15 16 - 4

I. Completed, finished surface shall be of consistent quality and free of deleterious materials such as organic

materials, nails, stones, and loose material. Surface shall not have depressions or humps greater than 1/4

inch in ten feet.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Do not allow traffic on decomposed granite paving for 5 days after placement or until compacted crushed

aggregate blended with admixture has fully cured. Cover for extended curing period.

B. Protect decomposed granite paving from damage until project completion.

C. Repair damaged areas to match specified requirements in accordance with admixture manufacturer’s printed

instructions.




Planting Irrigation

32 84 00 - 1

SECTION 32 84 00 – Planting Irrigation

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: Irrigation system


1. Living Roof Growing Medium

2. Plant List

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data and Shop Drawings showing sprinkler layout and flow characteristics. Include wiring

diagrams.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IRRIGATION COMPONENTS

NETAFIM TECHLINE® EZ 12mm Dripperline

Emitter flow rate: 0.4 GPH Emitter spacing: 6” Row spacing: 12” Burial depth: 1 -‐ 2” Flow per 100-‐‐feet of Techline: 84 GPH, 1.40GPM 12mm Netafim Insert Fittings. Maximum length of single lateral with 45-‐‐PSI inlet pressure: 150 feet

2.2 IRRIGATION CONTROLER (locate in mechanical closet)

Rainbird ESP-Me Irrigation Controller – Model ESP4MEI

Operating Specifications

Station timing: 1 minute to 6 hours

Seasonal Adjust; 5% to 200%

Max operating temperature: 149°F (65°C)

Electrical Specifications

Input required: 120 VAC ± 10%, 60Hz

(International models; 230/240 VAC ± 10%, 50/60Hz )

Output: 25.5 VAC 1A

Master Valve/Pump Start Relay

Operating Voltage: 24VAC 50/60Hz



Planting Irrigation

32 84 00 - 2

Max Coil Inrush: 11VA

Max Coil Holding: 5VA

Idle/Off power draw 0.06 amps at 120VAC

Power back-up not required. Nonvolatile memory permanently saves the current programming and a 10

year life lithium battery maintains the controllers time and date during power outages.

Certifications

UL, cUL, CE, CSA, C-Tick, FCC Part 15b, WEEE, S-Mark, IP24

Dimensions

Width: 10.7 in. (27,2 cm)

Height: 7.7 in. (19,5 cm)

Depth: 4.4 in. (11,2 cm)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Align Techline® EZ laterals parallel to the contours of the sloped roof. Use ½” SCH 40 PVC supply and exhaust header. Laterals to be spaced at 12”. Drip emitters should be triangulated from lateral to lateral. All pvc and Techline® EZ to be buried at 1” – 2” so no pipe is visible from soil

surface. Flush valve required plumbed to ½” PVC. Location of valve to be in mechanical room. Recommended to use 1” Rainbird Globe Valve with 45-‐‐PSI Pressure

Regulating Filter or equivalent.



Planting Irrigation

32 84 00 - 3

3.2 IRREGULAR IRRIGATION LAYOUT DIAGRAM




Living Roof Growing Medium

32 91 13 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide a Living Roof Substrate Mix using the four components listed below that will meet ASTM standards as follows: 1. Organic Components:

a. Well-Aged Organic Compost 15% b. Forest Humus 15% c. Mineral Aggregates: 1) Scoria/Lava Rock or Pumice 50% 2) Course Sand 20%

B. Total saturated load of living roof shall not exceed 40 pounds per square foot.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUBSTRATE CONSTITUENTS

A. Living Roof Substrate Mix: 15% well-aged compost, 15% forest humus, 50% lava rock (3/8” scoria), and 20% course sand.

B. Well-Aged Compost shall be finished humus with the following properties: 1. Types of acceptable products are composts, manures, mushroom composts, straw, alfalfa,

sludge, etc., that are low in salts, low in heavy metals, free from weed seeds, free of pathogens and other deleterious materials.

2. Composts made from peat mosses are not acceptable due to depleting stocks of this non- renewable resource and harm caused to peat bog ecosystems by mining the material.

3. Composed wood products are conditionally acceptable, stable humus must be present. Wood-based products are not acceptable which are based on redwood or cedar.

4. Sludge-based materials are not acceptable if contains a high level (toxic level) of zinc, copper, or other heavy metals based on substrate analysis.

5. Compost shall be aerobic without malodorous presence of decomposition products. 6. Humus material shall have an ash content of no less than 8% and no more than 50%. 7. The pH of the material shall be between 6 and 7.5. 8. The salt content shall be less than 10 milliohm/cm at 25 degrees C (Ece less than 10) on a

saturated paste extract. If the concentration of calcium sulfate in the saturation extract is greater than 25 millequivalent per liter, the maximum level of salinity can be increased 3 milliohm/cm at 25 degrees C, units (13 milliohm/cm at 25 degrees C).

9. Boron content of the saturated extract shall be less than 1.0 part per million. 10. Silicon content (acid-insoluble ash) shall be less than 20 percent. 11. Calcium carbonate shall not be present in alkaline substrates. 12. Carbon-nitrogen ratio shall be less than 25:1. 13. The maximum particle size shall be 13mm, 80 percent or more shall pass a No. 4 screen. 14. Maximum total permissible pollutant concentrations in organic amendment in parts per

million on a dry-weight basis: a. Arsenic: 20 b. Cadmium: 15 c. Chromium: 100 d. Cobalt: 150 e. Lead: 100 f. Mercury: 10 g. Molybdenum: 60 h. Nickel: 100 i. Selenium: 30 j. Silver: 10



Living Roof Growing Medium

32 91 13 - 2

k. Vanadium: 50 l. Zinc: 200

15. Forest Humus: Fir bark or other wood product. 16. Sand Particle Size istribution Range Requirements (Substrate Component: Size Definition

(mm); ~Allowable Range): a. Coarse Gravel: >4.0; 0% b. Fine Gravel: 2.0 to 4.0; 3 to 5% c. *Sand: 0.05 to 2.0; 88 to 93% d. Fine Sand: 0.05 to 0.15; <35% e. Silt: 0.002 to 0.05; <8% f. Clay: <0.002; <5% g. Organic Matter: <2.0; <3% h. Methods of Analysis Notes:

1) *ASTM F1632 17. Mineral aggregate specification as follows:

a. 100% passing 3/8 b. 63% passing #4 c. 26% passing #8 d. 23% passing #16 e. 21% passing #30 f. 19% passing #50 g. 13% passing #100 h. 6% passing #200

18. Sources: a. Tricounty Landscape Supply, 71 Elkhorn Road, Watsonville, CA 95076,

831-728-0111. b. American Soil & Stone Products, 2121 San Joaquin Street, Richmond, CA 94804,

510-292-3000 c. Or equivalent.

END OF SECTION



Plant List

32 93 00 - 1

SECTION 32 93 00 – Plant List (Vegetated roof)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Included in this Section: Plant list


1. Living Roof Growing Medium

2. Planting Irrigation

PART 2 PLANT LIST

Forbs and Grasses

Botanical Common Size Qty Achillea ‘Sonoma Coast’ Yarrow 4”pot 17

Armeria maritima Sea Thrift 4”pot 48

Corethrogyne filaginifolia Beach Aster 4”pot 26

Danthonia californica Calfornia Oatgrass 2” plug 30

Dudleya caespitos Sea Lettuce 4”pot 40

Dudleya fainosa Bluff Lettuce 4”pot 40

Erigeron glauca Seaside Daisy 4”pot 32

Eschscholzia californica var. maritima Coastal California Poppy Seed 28

Sidalcea maelveflora Checkerbloom 4”pot 23

Sisyrinchium bellum ‘Rocky Point’ Blue-eyed Grass 4”pot 33

Plant material to be installed in random groupings 8” on center to simulate a natural setting. Plant material should be hand-watered after planting and soil thoroughly saturated throughout the

living roof. Sources: Native Sons Nursery, 379 West El Campo Road, Arroyo Grande, CA 93420, (805)-481-

5996. Suncrest Nurseries, 400 Casserly Road, Watsonville, 95076, (831)-728-2595.

PART 3 Not Used

